Canon | UC-X45 Hi | User`s manual | Canon UC-X45 Hi User`s manual

Q0320_UM_En_Cover.fm Page 1 Wednesday, August 6, 2008 11:13 AM
DIGITAL CAMERA
User's Manual
No reproduction in any form of this manual, in whole or in part (except for brief
quotation in critical articles or reviews), may be made without written authorization
from NIKON CORPORATION.
© 2008 Nikon Corporation
En_01
6MB03011-01
En
Printed in Europe
SB8H01(11)
En
Where to Find It
Find what you’re looking for from:
i
The Table of Contents
➜
pp. viii–xiii
➜
pp. iv–vii
Find items by function or menu name.
i
The Q&A Index
Know what you want to do but don’t know the function name? Find it from the
“question and answer” index.
i
The Index
➜
pp. 276–278
➜
pp. 255–257
Search by key word.
i
Error Messages
If a warning is displayed in the control panel, viewfinder, or monitor, find the solution
here.
i
Troubleshooting
➜
pp. 250–254
Camera behaving unexpectedly? Find the solution here.
A For Your Safety
Before using the camera for the first time, read the safety instructions in “For Your Safety”
(pg. xiv).
Help
Use the camera’s on-board help feature for help on menu items and other topics. See page 21
for details.
Digitutor
“Digitutor”, a series of “watch and learn” manuals in movie form, is available from the following
website: http://www.nikondigitutor.com/index_eng.html
Package Contents
Be sure all items listed here were included with your camera. Memory cards are sold
separately.
❏ D90 digital camera ❏ Body cap
(pg. 3)
(pp. 3, 240)
❏ BM-10 LCD monitor ❏ DK-5 eyepiece cap
cover (pg. 17)
(pg. 17)
❏ EN-EL3e
❏ MH-18a quick
❏ AN-DC1 strap
charger with power
(pg. 17)
rechargeable
cable (pg. 22)
Li-ion battery with
terminal cover
(pp. 22, 23)
❏ BS-1 accessory shoe
cover (pg. 233)
❏ EG-D2 audio/video ❏ UC-E4 USB cable
cable (pg. 146)
(pp. 149, 151)
❏ Warranty
❏ User’s Manual (this guide)
❏ Quick Guide (a guide for first-time users describing the basic steps involved in such tasks
taking pictures, copying pictures to a computer, and printing pictures)
❏ Software Installation Guide
❏ Software Suite CD-ROM
❏ Registration card (U. S. A. only)
i
Symbols and Conventions
To make it easier to find the information you need, the following symbols and
conventions are used:
This icon marks cautions; information that should be read before use to
D prevent damage to the camera.
This icon marks notes; information that should be read before using the
A camera.
A
Trademark Information
Macintosh, Mac OS, and QuickTime are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. Microsoft,
Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks, or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. The SD logo is a trademark of the SD
Card Association. PictBridge and the SDHC logo are trademarks. HDMI, the HDMI logo and
High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC. All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other documentation
provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
holders.
ii
X Introduction
s Basic Photography and Playback
h More on Photography (All Modes)
t P, S, A, and M Modes
I More on Playback
Q Connections
o The Playback Menu
i The Shooting Menu
L Custom Settings
g The Setup Menu
u The Retouch Menu
w Recent Settings / v My Menu
n Technical Notes
iii
Q&A Index
Find what you’re looking for using this “question and answer” index.
New Features
Question
Can I use the monitor as a viewfinder?
How do I shoot movies?
Can I control how photos are processed?
How do I preserve details in shadows and
highlights?
How do I keep the subject in focus when changing
the composition?
How do I remove dust from the low-pass filter
protecting the image sensor?
Key phrase
Live view
Recording movies
Picture Controls
See page
43
50
108
Active D-Lighting
119
3D-tracking
173
Clean Image Sensor
203
Frequently-Asked Questions
Question
How do I use the menus?
How do I get more information on a menu?
Can I get quick access to frequently-used settings?
Can I get quick access to recently-used settings?
What do these indicators mean?
What does this warning mean?
Key phrase
Using the menus
Help
My Menu
Recent settings
Control panel, viewfinder
Error messages and displays
Number of exposures
How many more shots can I take with this card?
remaining
How much charge does the battery have left?
Battery level
What does “exposure” mean and how does it work? Exposure
What do I do with the viewfinder eyepiece cap?
Self timer, remote control
What optional flash units (Speedlights) can I use? Optional flash units
What lenses can I use?
Lenses
What accessories are available for my camera?
Accessories
What memory cards can I use?
Approved memory cards
What software is available for my camera?
Accessories
Who can I ask to repair or inspect my camera?
Servicing the camera
How do I clean the camera or lens?
Cleaning the camera
iv
See page
18
21
225
224
7, 9
255
35
34
79
66, 68
233
228
239
242
240
247
243
Camera Setup
Question
Key phrase
How do I stop parts of my photos from blinking?
Photo info, highlights
How do I focus the viewfinder?
How do I keep the monitor from turning off?
How do I set the clock?
How do I set the clock for daylight saving time?
How do I change time zones when I travel?
How do I adjust monitor brightness?
How do I restore default settings?
How do I turn off the light on the front of the
camera?
Can I display a framing grid in the viewfinder?
How do I view the control panel in the dark?
How do I keep the shutter speed and aperture
displays from turning off?
How do I change the self timer delay?
How do I change the remote delay?
How do I keep the camera from beeping?
Can I display the menus in a different language?
How do I keep the file number from being reset
when I insert a new memory card?
How do I reset file numbering to 1?
Viewfinder focus
Monitor off
See page
131,
163
32
180
World time
204
LCD brightness
Two-button reset
202
75
AF-assist illuminator
174
Grid display
LCD illuminator
181
8, 196
Auto meter off
35, 179
Self timer
Remote control
Beep
Language
66, 179
68, 180
180
204
File number sequence
182
v
Taking Photographs
Question
Is there an easy way to take snapshots?
Is there an easy way to take more creative shots?
Can I take pictures without the flash?
How do I bring out a portrait subject?
How can I get good landscape shots?
How do I take close ups of small objects?
How do I “freeze” a moving subject?
Can I include night backgrounds in my portraits?
How do I take a lot of photographs quickly?
Can I shoot a self-portrait?
Is there a remote control for this camera?
How do I adjust exposure?
How do I freeze or blur moving objects?
How do I blur background details?
Can I make photos brighter or darker?
How do I make a time exposure?
How do I use the flash?
Can the flash fire automatically when needed?
How do I keep the flash from firing?
How do I prevent red eye?
Can I control how the camera focuses?
How do I focus on a moving subject?
How do I choose where the camera focuses?
Can I change the composition after focusing?
Can I create a multiple exposure?
How do I improve image quality?
How do I take bigger photographs?
How can I get more photos on the memory card?
Can I take photos at a reduced size for e-mail?
vi
Key phrase
See page
Auto mode
34
Scene modes
41
j mode
34
Flash mode
71
ISO sensitivity
74
Portrait mode
41
Landscape mode
41
Close-up mode
42
Sports mode
42
Night portrait mode
42
Release mode
64
Self timer
66
Remote control
68
P, S, A, and M modes
78
Mode S (shutter-priority auto)
81
Mode A (aperture-priority
82
auto)
Exposure compensation
90
Long time-exposures
85
Flash photography
70
Flash mode
70
Red-eye reduction
Autofocus
Autofocus mode
Focus point
Focus lock
Multiple exposure
71
54
54
56
57
121
Image quality and size
62, 63
Viewing and Retouching Photographs
Question
Can I view my photographs on the camera?
Can I view more information about photos?
Key phrase
Camera playback
Photo info
See page
48, 128
129
49, 140,
162
162
How do I get rid of an unwanted photo?
Deleting individual photos
Can I delete several photos at once?
Can I zoom in on pictures to make sure they’re in
focus?
Can I protect photos from accidental deletion?
Is there an automatic playback (“slide show”)
option?
Can I view my photos on TV?
Can I view my photos in High Definition?
How do I copy photos to my computer?
How do I print photographs?
Can I print photos without a computer?
Delete
Playback zoom
138
Protect
Pictmotion
Slide show
Television playback
HDMI
Connecting to a computer
Printing photographs
Printing via USB
Can I print the date on my photographs?
Time stamp, DPOF
How do I order professional prints?
How do I bring out details in shadows?
Can I get rid of red eye?
Can I crop photographs on the camera?
Can I create a monochrome copy of a photograph?
Can I create a copy with different colors?
How do I adjust existing colors?
Can I make a small copy of a photograph?
Can I overlay two photos to make a single image?
Can I use the camera to create JPEG copies of NEF
(RAW) photographs?
Is there a quick way to retouch photographs?
Can I straighten photographs?
How do I reduce distortion?
Can I create the effect of a fisheye lens?
Can I compare retouched copies with the originals?
Print set (DPOF)
D-Lighting
Red-eye correction
Trim
Monochrome
Filter effects
Color balance
Small picture
Image overlay
139
141,
143
146
147
148
150
151
152,
155
157
212
212
213
214
215
216
216
218
NEF (RAW) processing
220
Quick retouch
Straighten
Distortion control
Fisheye
Side-by-side comparison
221
221
222
222
223
vii
Table of Contents
Q&A Index ................................................................................................................................... iv
For Your Safety ........................................................................................................................ xiv
Notices........................................................................................................................................ xvi
Introduction
1
Overview....................................................................................................................................... 2
Getting to Know the Camera................................................................................................. 3
The Camera Body ......................................................................................................................3
The Mode Dial.............................................................................................................................6
The Control Panel......................................................................................................................7
The Viewfinder............................................................................................................................9
The Shooting Information Display ................................................................................... 10
The Command Dials .............................................................................................................. 13
Attaching the AN-DC1 Camera Strap.............................................................................. 17
The BM-10 Monitor Cover ................................................................................................... 17
The DK-21 Viewfinder Eyepiece Cup............................................................................... 17
Camera Menus..........................................................................................................................18
Using Camera Menus ............................................................................................................ 19
Help ............................................................................................................................................. 21
First Steps ...................................................................................................................................22
Charge the Battery ................................................................................................................. 22
Insert the Battery .................................................................................................................... 23
Attach a Lens............................................................................................................................ 25
Basic Setup................................................................................................................................ 27
Inserting Memory Cards....................................................................................................... 29
Adjust Viewfinder Focus ...................................................................................................... 32
Basic Photography and Playback
33
“Point-and-Shoot” Photography (i and j Modes)...................................................34
Step 1: Turn the Camera On................................................................................................ 34
Step 2: Choose Shooting and Focus Modes ................................................................. 36
Step 3: Check Camera Settings.......................................................................................... 36
Step 4: Frame the Photograph .......................................................................................... 37
Step 5: Focus ............................................................................................................................ 38
Step 6: Shoot ............................................................................................................................ 39
Creative Photography (Scene Modes) .............................................................................41
k Portrait .............................................................................................................................. 41
l Landscape........................................................................................................................ 41
n Close Up ........................................................................................................................... 42
viii
m Sports.................................................................................................................................42
o Night Portrait ..................................................................................................................42
Framing Pictures in the Monitor (Live View)..................................................................43
Basic Playback ...........................................................................................................................48
Deleting Unwanted Photographs.....................................................................................49
Recording and Viewing Movies (Live View) ...................................................................50
More on Photography (All Modes)
53
Focus ............................................................................................................................................54
Autofocus ..................................................................................................................................54
Focus Point Selection ............................................................................................................56
Focus Lock .................................................................................................................................57
Manual Focus ...........................................................................................................................59
Image Quality and Size ..........................................................................................................61
Image Quality ...........................................................................................................................62
Image Size..................................................................................................................................63
Release Mode ............................................................................................................................64
Continuous Mode ...................................................................................................................65
Self-Timer Mode ($) ..............................................................................................................66
Using an Optional Remote Control (#) ............................................................................68
Using the Built-in Flash..........................................................................................................70
Flash Mode ................................................................................................................................71
ISO Sensitivity............................................................................................................................74
Two-Button Reset ....................................................................................................................75
P, S, A, and M Modes
77
Shutter Speed and Aperture................................................................................................78
Mode P (Programmed Auto) ..............................................................................................80
Mode S (Shutter-Priority Auto) ..........................................................................................81
Mode A (Aperture-Priority Auto).......................................................................................82
Mode M (Manual)....................................................................................................................83
Exposure .....................................................................................................................................87
Metering.....................................................................................................................................87
Autoexposure Lock (P, S, and A Modes Only)...............................................................88
Exposure Compensation......................................................................................................90
Flash Compensation ..............................................................................................................91
Exposure and Flash Bracketing..........................................................................................92
White Balance ...........................................................................................................................95
Fine-Tuning White Balance .................................................................................................97
Choosing a Color Temperature..........................................................................................99
Preset Manual........................................................................................................................ 100
ix
Picture Controls..................................................................................................................... 108
Selecting Nikon Picture Controls....................................................................................109
Modifying Existing Picture Controls ..............................................................................110
Creating Custom Picture Controls..................................................................................113
Sharing Custom Picture Controls ...................................................................................115
Managing Custom Picture Controls ..............................................................................117
Active D-Lighting.................................................................................................................. 119
Multiple Exposure ................................................................................................................ 121
The GP-1 GPS Unit ................................................................................................................ 124
More on Playback
127
Full-Frame Playback............................................................................................................. 128
Photo Information................................................................................................................129
Thumbnail Playback ............................................................................................................ 135
Calendar Playback ................................................................................................................ 136
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom........................................................................... 138
Protecting Photographs from Deletion........................................................................ 139
Deleting Individual Photographs ................................................................................... 140
Pictmotion............................................................................................................................... 141
Slide Shows............................................................................................................................. 143
Connections
145
Viewing Photographs on TV............................................................................................. 146
Standard Definition Devices.............................................................................................146
High-Definition Devices.....................................................................................................147
Connecting to a Computer ............................................................................................... 148
Before Connecting the Camera.......................................................................................148
Connecting the Camera.....................................................................................................149
Printing Photographs.......................................................................................................... 150
Menu Guide
159
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images.................................................................. 160
Selecting Multiple Pictures ...............................................................................................160
Delete...................................................................................................................................162
Playback Folder.................................................................................................................162
Hide Image .........................................................................................................................162
Display Mode.....................................................................................................................163
Image Review ....................................................................................................................163
Rotate Tall...........................................................................................................................163
Pictmotion ..........................................................................................................................163
x
Slide Show.......................................................................................................................... 164
Print Set (DPOF) ............................................................................................................... 164
C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options.................................................................. 165
Set Picture Control.......................................................................................................... 165
Manage Picture Control................................................................................................ 165
Image Quality ................................................................................................................... 165
Image Size.......................................................................................................................... 165
White Balance................................................................................................................... 165
ISO Sensitivity Settings.................................................................................................. 166
Active D-Lighting ............................................................................................................ 166
Color Space........................................................................................................................ 167
Long Exp. NR (Long Exposure Noise Reduction) ................................................. 167
High ISO NR ....................................................................................................................... 168
Active Folder ..................................................................................................................... 169
Multiple Exposure ........................................................................................................... 170
Movie setting .................................................................................................................... 170
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings.................................................. 171
A: Reset Custom Settings ............................................................................................ 172
a: Autofocus ........................................................................................................................... 173
a1: AF-area Mode............................................................................................................. 173
a2: Center Focus Point................................................................................................... 174
a3: Built-in AF-assist Illuminator................................................................................. 174
a4: AF Point Illumination .............................................................................................. 175
a5: Focus Point Wrap-Around..................................................................................... 175
a6: AE-L/AF-L for MB-D80 ............................................................................................. 176
a7: Live View Autofocus ................................................................................................ 176
b: Metering/Exposure......................................................................................................... 177
b1: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl. ................................................................................. 177
b2: Easy Exposure Compensation ............................................................................. 177
b3: Center-Weighted Area ........................................................................................... 178
b4: Fine Tune Optimal Exposure................................................................................ 178
c: Timers/AE Lock ................................................................................................................. 179
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L ................................................................................ 179
c2: Auto Meter-off Delay............................................................................................... 179
c3: Self-Timer..................................................................................................................... 179
c4: Monitor off Delay...................................................................................................... 180
c5: Remote on Duration................................................................................................ 180
d: Shooting/Display............................................................................................................. 180
d1: Beep .............................................................................................................................. 180
d2: Viewfinder Grid Display ......................................................................................... 181
d3: ISO Display and Adjustment ................................................................................ 181
d4: Viewfinder Warning Display................................................................................. 181
d5: Screen Tips.................................................................................................................. 182
d6: CL Mode Shooting Speed ..................................................................................... 182
d7: File Number Sequence........................................................................................... 182
d8: Shooting Info Display ............................................................................................. 183
xi
d9: LCD Illumination .......................................................................................................183
d10: Exposure Delay Mode...........................................................................................183
d11: Flash Warning..........................................................................................................183
d12: MB-D80 Battery Type ............................................................................................184
e: Bracketing/Flash...............................................................................................................185
e1: Flash Shutter Speed .................................................................................................185
e2: Flash Cntrl for Built-in Flash ..................................................................................185
e3: Modeling Flash...........................................................................................................191
e4: Auto Bracketing Set .................................................................................................191
e5: Auto FP .........................................................................................................................195
e6: Bracketing Order .......................................................................................................195
f: Controls ................................................................................................................................196
f1: D Switch.......................................................................................................................196
f2: OK Button (Shooting Mode)...................................................................................196
f3: Assign FUNC. Button.................................................................................................197
f4: Assign AE-L/AF-L Button .........................................................................................200
f5: Customize Command Dials ....................................................................................201
f6: No Memory Card? ......................................................................................................201
f7: Reverse Indicators......................................................................................................201
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup.................................................................................. 202
Format Memory Card .....................................................................................................202
LCD Brightness..................................................................................................................202
Clean Image Sensor.........................................................................................................203
Lock Mirror up for Cleaning .........................................................................................203
Video Mode........................................................................................................................203
HDMI.....................................................................................................................................203
World Time .........................................................................................................................204
Language ............................................................................................................................204
Image Comment ..............................................................................................................205
Auto Image Rotation ......................................................................................................205
Image Dust off Ref Photo ..............................................................................................206
Battery Info.........................................................................................................................208
GPS ........................................................................................................................................208
Eye-Fi Upload ....................................................................................................................208
Firmware Version .............................................................................................................208
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies ................................................ 209
Creating Retouched Copies..............................................................................................210
D-Lighting...........................................................................................................................212
Red-Eye Correction..........................................................................................................212
Trim .......................................................................................................................................213
Monochrome.....................................................................................................................214
Filter Effects........................................................................................................................215
Color Balance.....................................................................................................................216
Small Picture ......................................................................................................................216
Image Overlay ...................................................................................................................218
NEF (RAW) Processing ....................................................................................................220
Quick Retouch...................................................................................................................221
xii
Straighten .......................................................................................................................... 221
Distortion Control ........................................................................................................... 222
Fisheye ................................................................................................................................ 222
Side-by-Side Comparison............................................................................................. 223
m Recent Settings/O My Menu ....................................................................................... 224
m Recent Settings: Viewing Recent Settings ............................................................. 224
O My Menu: Creating a Custom Menu ........................................................................ 225
Technical Notes
227
Compatible Lenses............................................................................................................... 228
Compatible CPU Lenses .................................................................................................... 229
Non-CPU Lenses ................................................................................................................... 230
Optional Flash Units (Speedlights)................................................................................. 233
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS) ................................................................. 233
Flash Contacts ....................................................................................................................... 238
Other Accessories ................................................................................................................. 239
Caring for the Camera......................................................................................................... 243
Storage..................................................................................................................................... 243
Cleaning .................................................................................................................................. 243
The Low-Pass Filter.............................................................................................................. 244
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions............................................................. 248
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................... 250
Display ..................................................................................................................................... 250
Shooting (All Modes) .......................................................................................................... 251
Shooting (i, j, k, l, m, n, and o modes) ............................................................. 252
Shooting (P, S, A, M)........................................................................................................... 252
Playback .................................................................................................................................. 253
Miscellaneous........................................................................................................................ 254
Error Messages....................................................................................................................... 255
Appendix ................................................................................................................................. 258
Available Settings and Defaults...................................................................................... 258
Memory Card Capacity ...................................................................................................... 262
Exposure Program ............................................................................................................... 263
Bracketing Programs .......................................................................................................... 264
Flash Control.......................................................................................................................... 265
Shutter Speeds Available with the Built-in Flash ..................................................... 265
Aperture, Sensitivity, and Flash Range......................................................................... 266
Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 267
Index.......................................................................................................................................... 276
xiii
For Your Safety
To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to others, read the following
safety precautions in their entirety before using this equipment. Keep these safety instructions
where all those who use the product will read them.
The consequences that could result from failure to observe the precautions listed in this
section are indicated by the following symbol:
icon marks warnings. To prevent possible injury, read all warnings before using
A This
this Nikon product.
❚❚ WARNINGS
A Keep the sun out of the frame
Keep the sun well out of the frame when
shooting backlit subjects. Sunlight
focused into the camera when the sun is
in or close to the frame could cause a fire.
A Do not look at the sun through the viewfinder
Viewing the sun or other strong light
source through the viewfinder could
cause permanent visual impairment.
A Using the viewfinder diopter control
When operating the viewfinder diopter
control with your eye to the viewfinder,
care should be taken not to put your
finger in your eye accidentally.
A Turn off immediately in the event of malfunction
Should you notice smoke or an unusual
smell coming from the equipment or AC
adapter (available separately), unplug
the AC adapter and remove the battery
immediately, taking care to avoid burns.
Continued operation could result in
injury. After removing the battery, take
the equipment to a Nikon-authorized
service center for inspection.
xiv
A Do not disassemble
Touching the product’s internal parts
could result in injury. In the event of
malfunction, the product should be
repaired only by a qualified technician.
Should the product break open as the
result of a fall or other accident, remove
the battery and/or AC adapter and then
take the product to a Nikon-authorized
service center for inspection.
A Do not use in the presence of flammable gas
Do not use electronic equipment in the
presence of flammable gas, as this could
result in explosion or fire.
A Keep out of reach of children
Failure to observe this precaution could
result in injury.
A Do not place the strap around the neck of an
infant or child
Placing the camera strap around the neck
of an infant or child could result in
strangulation.
A Observe caution when using the flash
• Using the camera with the flash in close
contact with the skin or other objects
could cause burns.
• Using the flash close to the subject’s
eyes could cause temporary visual
impairment. Particular care should be
observed when photographing infants,
when the flash should be no less than
one meter (39 in.) from the subject.
A Observe proper precautions when handling
batteries
Batteries may leak or explode if
improperly handled. Observe the
following precautions when handling
batteries for use in this product:
• Use only batteries approved for use in
this equipment.
• Do not short or disassemble the battery.
• Be sure the product is off before
replacing the battery. If you are using
an AC adapter, be sure it is unplugged.
• Do not attempt to insert the battery
upside down or backwards.
• Do not expose the battery to flame or to
excessive heat.
• Do not immerse in or expose to water.
• Replace the terminal cover when
transporting the battery. Do not
transport or store the battery with
metal objects such as necklaces or
hairpins.
• Batteries are prone to leakage when
fully discharged. To avoid damage to
the product, be sure to remove the
battery when no charge remains.
• When the battery is not in use, attach
the terminal cover and store in a cool,
dry place.
• The battery may be hot immediately
after use or when the product has been
used on battery power for an extended
period. Before removing the battery
turn the camera off and allow the
battery to cool.
• Discontinue use immediately should
you notice any changes in the battery,
such as discoloration or deformation.
A Observe proper precautions when handling the
quick charger
• Keep dry. Failure to observe this
precaution could result in fire or electric
shock.
• Dust on or near the metal parts of the
plug should be removed with a dry
cloth. Continued use could result in fire.
• Do not handle the power cable or go
near the charger during thunderstorms.
Failure to observe this precaution could
result in electric shock.
• Do not damage, modify, or forcibly tug
or bend the power cable. Do not place
it under heavy objects or expose it to
heat or flame. Should the insulation be
damaged and the wires become
exposed, take the power cable to a
Nikon-authorized service
representative for inspection. Failure to
observe this precaution could result in
fire or electric shock.
• Do not handle the plug or charger with
wet hands. Failure to observe this
precaution could result in electric
shock.
A Use appropriate cables
When connecting cables to the input and
output jacks, use only the cables
provided or sold by Nikon for the
purpose to maintain compliance with
product regulations.
A CD-ROMs
CD-ROMs containing software or
manuals should not be played back on
audio CD equipment. Playing CD-ROMs
on an audio CD player could cause
hearing loss or damage the equipment.
A Avoid contact with liquid crystal
Should the monitor break, care should be
taken to avoid injury due to broken glass
and to prevent the liquid crystal from the
monitor touching the skin or entering
the eyes or mouth.
xv
Notices
• No part of the manuals included with this
product may be reproduced, transmitted,
transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or
translated into any language in any form,
by any means, without Nikon’s prior
written permission.
• Nikon reserves the right to change the
specifications of the hardware and
software described in these manuals at
any time and without prior notice.
• Nikon will not be held liable for any
damages resulting from the use of this
product.
• While every effort has been made to
ensure that the information in these
manuals is accurate and complete, we
would appreciate it were you to bring any
errors or omissions to the attention of the
Nikon representative in your area (address
provided separately).
Notices for Customers in the U.S.A.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference Statement
This equipment has been tested and found
to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules.
These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful
CAUTIONS
Modifications
interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
The FCC requires the user be notified that any
radio frequency energy and, if not installed
changes or modifications made to this device
and used in accordance with the instructions,
that are not expressly approved by Nikon
may cause harmful interference to radio
Corporation may void the user’s authority to
communications. However, there is no
operate the equipment.
guarantee that interference will not occur in
Interface Cables
a particular installation. If this equipment
Use the interface cables sold or provided by
does cause harmful interference to radio or
Nikon for your equipment. Using other
television reception, which can be
interface cables may exceed the limits of
determined by turning the equipment off
Class B Part 15 of the FCC rules.
and on, the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one or more of
Notice for Customers in the State of California
WARNING: Handling the cord on this product
the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
may expose you to lead, a chemical known to
• Increase the separation between the
the State of California to cause birth defects
equipment and receiver.
or other reproductive harm. Wash hands
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a
after handling.
circuit different from that to which the
Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road,
receiver is connected.
Melville, New York 11747-3064, U.S.A.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced
Tel.: 631-547-4200
radio/television technician for help.
xvi
Notices for Customers in Canada
CAUTION
ATTENTION
This Class B digital apparatus complies with
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est
Canadian ICES-003.
conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
Symbol for Separate Collection in European Countries
This symbol indicates that this product is to be collected separately.
The following apply only to users in European countries:
• This product is designated for separate collection at an appropriate collection
point. Do not dispose of as household waste.
• For more information, contact the retailer or the local authorities in charge of
waste management.
Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction
Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally copied or reproduced
by means of a scanner, digital camera, or other device may be punishable by law.
• Items prohibited by law from being copied or
• Comply with copyright notices
reproduced
The copying or reproduction of
Do not copy or reproduce paper money,
copyrighted creative works such as books,
coins, securities, government bonds, or
music, paintings, woodcuts, prints, maps,
local government bonds, even if such
drawings, movies, and photographs is
copies or reproductions are stamped
governed by national and international
“Sample.”
copyright laws. Do not use this product for
the purpose of making illegal copies or to
The copying or reproduction of paper
infringe copyright laws.
money, coins, or securities which are
circulated in a foreign country is
prohibited.
Unless the prior permission of the
government has been obtained, the
copying or reproduction or unused
postage stamps or post cards issued by the
government is prohibited.
The copying or reproduction of stamps
issued by the government and of certified
documents stipulated by law is prohibited.
• Cautions on certain copies and reproductions
The government has issued cautions on
copies or reproductions of securities
issued by private companies (shares, bills,
checks, gift certificates, etc.), commuter
passes, or coupon tickets, except when a
minimum of necessary copies are to be
provided for business use by a company.
Also, do not copy or reproduce passports
issued by the government, licenses issued
by public agencies and private groups, ID
cards, and tickets, such as passes and meal
coupons.
xvii
Disposing of Data Storage Devices
Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data storage devices
does not completely erase the original image data. Deleted files can sometimes be recovered
from discarded storage devices using commercially available software, potentially resulting in
the malicious use of personal image data. Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user’s
responsibility.
Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another person, erase all
data using commercial deletion software, or format the device and then completely refill it
with images containing no private information (for example, pictures of empty sky). Be sure to
also replace any pictures selected for preset manual. Care should be taken to avoid injury
when physically destroying data storage devices.
Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories
Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex electronic circuitry.
Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including battery chargers, batteries, AC adapters,
and flash accessories) certified by Nikon specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are
engineered and proven to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this
electronic circuitry.
The use of non-Nikon electronic accessories could damage the camera and may
void your Nikon warranty. The use of third-party rechargeable Li-ion batteries not
bearing the Nikon holographic seal shown at right could interfere with normal
operation of the camera or result in the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, or leaking.
For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local authorized Nikon dealer.
A
Before Taking Important Pictures
Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or before taking the
camera on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the camera is functioning normally. Nikon will
not be held liable for damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction.
A
Life-Long Learning
As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing product support and
education, continually-updated information is available on-line at the following sites:
• For users in the U.S.A.: http://www.nikonusa.com/
• For users in Europe and Africa: http://www.europe-nikon.com/support
• For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East: http://www.nikon-asia.com/
Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information, tips, answers to
frequently-asked questions (FAQs), and general advice on digital imaging and photography.
Additional information may be available from the Nikon representative in your area. See the
following URL for contact information: http://imaging.nikon.com/
xviii
XIntroduction
X
This chapter covers information you will need to know before using the camera,
including the names of camera parts, how to use the camera menus, and how to
ready the camera for use.
Overview .........................................................................................................................
2
Getting to Know the Camera.......................................................................................
3
The Camera Body........................................................................................................................
3
The Mode Dial ..............................................................................................................................
6
The Control Panel........................................................................................................................
7
The Viewfinder .............................................................................................................................
9
The Shooting Information Display........................................................................................
10
The Command Dials...................................................................................................................
13
Attaching the AN-DC1 Camera Strap ..................................................................................
17
The BM-10 Monitor Cover........................................................................................................
17
The DK-21 Viewfinder Eyepiece Cup....................................................................................
17
Camera Menus ...............................................................................................................
18
Using Camera Menus.................................................................................................................
19
Help..................................................................................................................................................
21
First Steps........................................................................................................................
22
Charge the Battery .....................................................................................................................
22
Insert the Battery ........................................................................................................................
23
Attach a Lens ................................................................................................................................
25
Basic Setup ....................................................................................................................................
27
Inserting Memory Cards...........................................................................................................
29
Adjust Viewfinder Focus...........................................................................................................
32
1
Overview
X
Thank you for your purchase of a Nikon single-lens reflex (SLR) digital camera. To get
the most from your camera, please be sure to read all instructions thoroughly and
keep them where they will be read by all who use the product.
D
Use Only Nikon Brand Accessories
Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with your Nikon digital
camera are engineered and proven to operate within its operational and safety requirements.
THE USE OF NON-NIKON ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR NIKON WARRANTY.
D
Servicing the Camera and Accessories
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon recommends that the
camera be inspected by the original retailer or a Nikon-authorized service representative once
every one to two years, and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees
apply to these services). Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if
the camera is used professionally. Any accessories regularly used with the camera, such as
lenses or optional flash units, should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced.
2
Getting to Know the Camera
Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls and displays. You
may find it helpful to bookmark this section and refer to it as you read through the
rest of the manual.
X
The Camera Body
6
7
1
8
2
9
10
3
11
12
4
13
19
5
14
15
16
20
21
22
17
23
18
24
25
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Mode dial.............................................................6
Eyelet for camera strap .................................17
Focal plane mark (E) ....................................60
Accessory shoe (for optional flash
unit)................................................................ 233
Accessory shoe cover ................................. 233
Power switch ....................................................34
Shutter-release button..................................38
E (exposure compensation) button........90
Two-button reset button .............................75
Z (metering) button.....................................87
Q (format) button.........................................30
I (release mode) button ............................64
AF (autofocus mode) button .......................54
Two-button reset button .............................75
Control panel...................................................... 7
13 Main command dial.......................................13
14 AF-assist illuminator ................................... 174
Self-timer lamp................................................67
Red-eye reduction lamp ..............................71
15 Sub-command dial ........................................13
16 Fn button................................................197, 198
17 Depth-of-field preview button ................. 82
18 Speaker
19 Body cap ......................................................... 240
20 CPU contacts
21 Mounting index...............................................25
22 Lens mount.......................................................60
23 Tripod socket
24 Battery-chamber cover.................................23
25 Battery-chamber cover latch......................23
3
The Camera Body (Continued)
1
X
2
3
4
10
5
11
6
12
13
7
14
8
9
1 Built-in flash......................................................70
2 M (flash mode) button...................................70
Y (flash compensation) button...............91
3 Microphone .............................................50, 170
4 Infrared receiver..............................................69
5 D (bracketing) button .................................92
6 Connector cover .............. 146, 147, 149, 151
7 Lens release button .......................................26
8 Focus-mode selector..............................54, 59
4
9 Mirror.........................................................43, 246
10 DC-IN connector for optional EH-5a or
EH-5 AC adapter ........................................239
11 USB connector
Connecting to a computer ....................149
Connecting to a printer...........................151
12 HDMI mini-pin connector .........................147
13 Video connector ...........................................146
14 Accessory terminal ......................................241
The Camera Body (Continued)
1
2
X
10
3
4
11
12
13
14
5
6
15
7
8
9
16
17
18
1 Viewfinder eyepiece ......................................32
2 DK-21 viewfinder eyepiece cup.................17
3 O (delete) button
Deleting pictures .........................................49
Deleting pictures during playback..... 140
Q (format) button.........................................30
4 Monitor
Live view .........................................................43
Viewing pictures ..........................................50
Full-frame playback.................................. 128
5 K (playback) button ........................... 50, 128
6 G (menu) button.............................. 19, 159
7 L (help/protect) button.................. 21, 139
WB (white balance) button
White balance ...............................................95
Fine tuning white balance........................97
Color temperature.......................................99
8 W (thumbnail/playback zoom out)
button........................................................... 135
ISO (ISO sensitivity) button...........................74
9 X (playback zoom in) button................... 138
QUAL (image quality/size) button
Image quality ................................................62
Image size.......................................................63
10 Diopter adjustment control........................32
11 AE-L/AF-L button
Focus lock.......................................................57
Choosing role............................................. 200
12 a (live view) button
Taking photographs ...................................43
Shooting movies..........................................50
13 Multi selector ...................................................19
14 J (OK) button..................................................19
15 Memory card slot cover................................29
16 Focus selector lock .........................................56
17 Memory card access lamp....................29, 39
18 R (information display/quick settings
display) button ......................................10, 12
5
The Mode Dial
The camera offers a choice of the following eleven shooting modes:
X ❚❚ P, S, A, and M Modes
Select these modes for full control over camera settings.
P—Programmed auto (pg. 80): Camera
chooses shutter speed and aperture, user
controls other settings.
A—Aperture-priority auto (pg. 82): Adjust
aperture to soften background details or
increase depth-of-field to bring both main
subject and background into focus.
S—Shutter-priority auto (pg. 81): Choose fast
shutter speeds to freeze action, slow shutter M—Manual (pg. 83): Match shutter speed
speeds to suggest motion by blurring
and aperture to your creative intent.
moving objects.
❚❚ Auto Modes
Select these modes for simple, point-and-shoot
photography.
i Auto (pg. 34): Camera adjusts settings automatically to produce optimal results with “point-andshoot” simplicity. Recommended for first-time
users of digital cameras.
j Auto (flash off) (pg. 34): As above, except that the
flash will not fire even when lighting is poor.
❚❚ Scene Modes
Selecting a scene mode automatically optimizes settings to suit the selected
scene, making creative photography as simple as rotating the mode dial.
k Portrait (pg. 41): Shoot portraits with back- m Sports (pg. 42): Freeze motion for dynamic
ground in soft focus.
sports shots.
l Landscape (pg. 41): Preserve details in
landscape shots.
n Close up (pg. 42): Take vivid close-ups of
flowers, insects, and other small objects.
6
o Night portrait (pg. 42): Shoot portraits
against a dimly-lit backdrop.
The Control Panel
14
13
1
2
12
11
10
9
8
3
4
5
6
1 Shutter speed
Shutter-priority auto...................................81
Manual exposure mode ............................83
Exposure compensation value...................90
Flash compensation value...........................91
White balance fine-tuning...........................97
White balance color temperature.............99
White balance preset number................. 100
Number of shots in bracketing
sequence.........................................................92
2 Battery indicator..............................................34
3 Flash mode........................................................71
4 Image size..........................................................63
5 Image quality ...................................................62
6 White balance fine-tuning indicator........97
7 White balance ..................................................95
X
7
8 ISO sensitivity compensation indicator
ISO sensitivity................................................74
ISO display and adjustment.................. 181
9 “K” (appears when memory remains for
over 1000 exposures) .................................35
10 “Beep” indicator ........................................... 180
11 GPS connection indicator......................... 124
12 Release mode...................................................64
13 Aperture (f-number)
Aperture-priority auto ...............................82
Manual exposure mode ............................83
Bracketing increment
AE/flash bracketing.....................................92
White balance bracketing ..................... 191
Bracketing programs............................... 264
14 Color temperature..........................................99
A
Large-Capacity Memory Cards
When enough memory remains on the memory card to record a
thousand or more pictures at current settings, the number of
exposures remaining will be shown in thousands, rounded down to
the nearest hundred (e.g., if there is room for 1,260 exposures, the
exposure count display will show 1.2 K).
7
The Control Panel (Continued)
X
15
28
16
27
17
26
18
25
24
23
19
22
21
20
15 Flash compensation indicator ...................91
16 “Clock not set” indicator
Clock battery.................................................27
Warnings...................................................... 255
17 Flexible program indicator..........................80
18 Metering ............................................................87
19 Focus points .....................................................56
AF-area mode ............................................... 173
20 Autofocus mode .............................................54
21 Black-and-white indicator ........................ 181
22 Number of exposures remaining .............35
Number of shots remaining before
memory buffer fills......................................65
Preset white balance recording
indicator....................................................... 101
Capture mode indicator............................ 148
ISO sensitivity
ISO sensitivity................................................74
ISO display and adjustment.................. 181
23 ISO sensitivity indicator ............................... 74
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator...................166
24 Bracketing progress indicator
AE/flash bracketing .................................... 92
White balance bracketing ......................191
ADL bracketing ..........................................193
25 Bracketing indicator ...................................... 92
26 White balance bracketing indicator ......191
27 Exposure compensation indicator........... 90
28 Multiple exposure indicator .....................121
A
The LCD Illuminator
Holding the power switch in the D position activates the
exposure meters and the control panel backlight (LCD
illuminator), allowing the display to be read in the dark.
After the power switch is released, the illuminator will
remain lit while the camera exposure meters are active (six
seconds at default settings) or until the shutter is released
or the power switch is rotated to D again.
8
Power switch
The Viewfinder
1
5
2
6
7
3
4
X
15
9 10
8
20
11
12
21
13 14
16
17 18 19
22
24
25
23
1 Framing grid (displayed when On is
selected for Custom Setting d2).......... 181
2 Reference circle for center-weighted
metering .........................................................87
3 Battery indicator * ...........................................34
4 Black-and-white indicator * ...................... 181
5 Focus points...................................54, 173, 174
6 Center focus point (normal frame) ........ 174
7 Center focus point (wide frame)............. 174
8 “No memory card” warning * ................... 181
9 Focus indicator .........................................38, 60
10 Flash value (FV) lock indicator ................ 198
11 Shutter speed............................................81, 83
12 Aperture (f-number) ...............................82, 83
13 Battery indicator .............................................34
14 White balance bracketing indicator...... 191
15 Bracketing indicator ......................................92
16 ISO sensitivity indicator................................74
17 Number of exposures remaining ............. 35
Number of shots remaining before
memory buffer fills......................................65
White balance recording indicator ....... 101
Exposure compensation value ..................90
Flash compensation value ..........................91
Capture mode indicator............................ 148
ISO sensitivity......................................... 74, 181
18 “K” (appears when memory remains for
over 1000 exposures).................................35
19 Flash-ready indicator.....................................42
20 Autoexposure (AE) lock indicator.............88
21 Electronic analog exposure display .........84
Exposure compensation ..............................90
22 Flash compensation indicator ...................91
23 Exposure compensation indicator ...........90
24 Auto ISO sensitivity indicator.................. 166
25 ISO sensitivity compensation indicator..74
* Can be hidden with Custom Setting d4 (pg. 181).
D
The Viewfinder Display
Owing to the characteristics of this type of viewfinder display, you may notice fine lines
radiating outward from the selected focus point. This is normal and does not indicate a
malfunction. If the battery is totally exhausted or not inserted, the display in the viewfinder
will dim. The viewfinder display will return to normal when a fully-charged battery is inserted.
D
The Control Panel and Viewfinder
The response times and brightness of the control panel and viewfinder may vary with
temperature.
9
The Shooting Information Display
X
Shooting information, including shutter speed, aperture, the
number of exposures remaining, and AF-area mode, is
displayed in the monitor when the R button is pressed. Press
the R button again to change selected settings (pg. 12). To
clear shooting information from the monitor, press the R
button a third time or press the shutter-release button halfway.
At default settings, the monitor will turn off automatically if no
operations are performed for about 10 seconds.
12
3
4
5
6
7
20
19
8
9
10
11
18
17
16
15
14
21 22 23 24 25
13
12
26
37
27
28
29
30
36
35
34
33
A
R button
32
31
See Also
For information on choosing how long the monitor stays on, see Custom Setting c4 (Monitor
off delay, pg. 180). For information on changing the color of the lettering in the shooting
information display, see Custom Setting d8 (Shooting info display, pg. 183).
10
The Shooting Information Display (Continued)
1 Shooting mode
i auto/j auto (flash off ).........................34
Scene modes .................................................41
P, S, A, and M modes......................................78
2 Flexible program indicator ..........................80
3 Shutter speed
Shutter-priority auto...................................81
Manual exposure mode ............................83
Exposure compensation value...................90
Flash compensation value...........................91
Color temperature..........................................99
Number of shots in bracketing
sequence............................................... 92, 191
4 Aperture (f-number)
Aperture priority auto................................82
Manual exposure mode ............................83
Bracketing increment
AE/flash bracketing.....................................92
White balance bracketing...................... 191
Bracketing programs............................... 264
5 Release mode...................................................64
6 Continuous shooting speed ............. 64, 182
7 Remote control mode indicator ................68
Self-timer mode indicator............................66
8 ISO sensitivity indicator ................................74
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator .................. 166
9 “Beep” indicator............................................ 180
10 “K” (appears when memory remains for
over 1000 exposures) .................................35
11 White balance ..................................................95
White balance fine-tuning indicator........97
12 AE-L/AF-L button assignment..................... 200
13 Fn button assignment................................. 197
14 Picture Control indicator........................... 108
15 Active D-Lighting indicator ....................... 119
16 High ISO noise reduction indicator ....... 168
17 Long exposure noise reduction
indicator....................................................... 167
18 Metering ............................................................87
19 Flash mode........................................................71
Flash control mode for
optional flash units .................................. 233
20 Electronic analog exposure display .........84
Exposure compensation ..............................90
Bracketing progress indicator
AE/flash bracketing.....................................92
White balance bracketing ..................... 191
ADL bracketing.......................................... 193
21 AC adapter indicator .....................................34
22 Flash value (FV) lock indicator ................ 198
23 Flash compensation indicator....................91
24 Exposure compensation indicator ...........90
25 Multiple exposure indicator ...................... 121
26 Bracketing indicator
AE/flash bracketing.....................................92
White balance bracketing ..................... 191
ADL bracketing.......................................... 193
27 Active D-Lighting bracketing amount ... 193
28 Image comment indicator........................ 205
29 Autofocus mode .............................................54
30 ISO sensitivity......................................... 74, 181
31 Number of exposures remaining .............35
32 GPS connection indicator......................... 124
33 Auto-area AF indicator............................... 173
3D-tracking indicator ................................. 173
Focus point .......................................................54
AF-area mode indicator............................. 173
34 Image size..........................................................63
35 Image quality ...................................................62
36 “Clock not set” indicator .................... 27, 255
37 Camera battery indicator.............................34
MB-D80 battery type display................... 184
MB-D80 battery indicator......................... 184
X
11
❚❚ Changing Settings in the Shooting Information Display (Quick Settings Display)
X
To change settings for the items listed below, press the R
button in the shooting information display. Highlight items
using the multi selector and press J to jump to the menu for
the highlighted item.
R button
7
1
1
2
3
4
12
2
3
4
Long exposure noise reduction ............. 167
High ISO noise reduction.......................... 168
Active D-Lighting ........................................ 119
Picture Control.............................................. 108
5
6
5 Fn button assignment .................................197
6 AE-L/AF-L button assignment .....................200
7 Tip display.......................................................182
The Command Dials
The main- and sub-command dials are used alone or in combination with other
controls to adjust a variety of settings.
M button:
flash mode and
flash compensation
X
D button:
bracketing
Sub-command dial
E button: exposure
compensation
I button: release mode
B button: autofocus mode
Main-command dial
Z button: metering
L (WB) button:
white balance
W (ISO) button:
ISO sensitivity
X (QUAL) button:
image quality/image size
❚❚ Image Quality and Size
Set image quality (pg. 62).
+
X (QUAL) button Main command
dial
Control panel
13
Choose an image size (pg. 63).
+
X
X (QUAL) button
Sub-command
dial
Control panel
Main command
dial
Control panel
❚❚ Autofocus Mode
Choose an autofocus mode
(pg. 54).
+
B button
❚❚ Release Mode
Choose a release mode
(pg. 64).
+
I button
Main command
dial
Control panel
❚❚ ISO Sensitivity
Set ISO sensitivity (pg. 74).
+
W ISO button
Main command
dial
Control panel
Mode P
Main command
dial
Control panel
❚❚ Exposure
Choose a combination of
aperture and shutter speed
(exposure mode P; pg. 80).
14
Choose a shutter speed
(exposure mode S or M; pp. 81,
83).
X
Mode S or M
Main command
dial
Control panel
Mode A or M
Sub-command
dial
Control panel
Main command
dial
Control panel
Choose an aperture
(exposure mode A or M;
pp. 82, 83).
Choose a metering method
(pg. 87).
+
Z button
Set exposure compensation
(pg. 90).
+
E button
Activate or cancel bracketing/
select number of shots in
bracketing sequence (pp. 92,
191). Not displayed in ADL
bracketing (pg. 193).
Main command
dial
Control panel
+
D button
Main command
dial
Control panel
15
Select bracketing exposure
increment (pg. 92, 192).
+
X
D button
Sub-command
dial
Control panel
Main command
dial
Control panel
Sub-command
dial
Control panel
Main command
dial
Control panel
Sub-command
dial
Control panel
❚❚ White Balance
Choose a white balance
setting (pg. 95).
+
L (WB)
button
Fine-tune white balance (pg.
97), set color temperature
(pg. 99), or choose a white
balance preset (pg. 106).
+
L (WB)
button
❚❚ Flash Settings
Choose flash mode (pg. 71).
+
M button
Adjust flash compensation
(pg. 91).
+
M (Y) button
16
Attaching the AN-DC1 Camera Strap
Attach the strap as shown below.
X
The BM-10 Monitor Cover
A clear plastic cover is provided with the camera to keep the
monitor clean and protect it when the camera is not in use. To
attach the cover, insert the projection on the top of the cover
into the matching indentation above the camera monitor (q)
and press the bottom of the cover until it clicks into place (w).
To remove the cover, hold the camera firmly and pull the
bottom of the cover gently outwards as shown at right.
The DK-21 Viewfinder Eyepiece Cup
Before attaching the DK-5 viewfinder eyepiece cap and other
viewfinder accessories (pg. 239), remove the viewfinder
eyepiece cup by placing your fingers underneath the flanges at
either side and sliding it off as shown at right.
17
Camera Menus
X
Most shooting, playback, and setup options can be accessed
from the camera menus. To view the menus, press the G
button.
G button
Tabs
Choose from playback, shooting,
Custom Settings, setup, retouch, and
recent settings menus (see below).
Slider shows position in
current menu.
Q
If “Q” is displayed,
help for current item
can be viewed by
pressing L button
(pg. 21).
Current settings
are shown by
icons.
Menu options
Options in current menu.
The following menus are available:
D
C
A
B
N
Adjust playback settings and manage photos.
Adjust shooting settings.
Personalize camera settings.
Format memory cards and perform basic camera setup.
Create retouched copies of existing photographs.
Select from the twenty most recently used menu items. If
m Recent settings (pg. 224) desired, a custom menu (“My Menu”) can be displayed in place
of Recent settings (pg. 224).
18
Playback
Shooting
Custom Settings
Setup
Retouch
(pg. 160)
(pg. 165)
(pg. 171)
(pg. 202)
(pg. 209)
Using Camera Menus
The multi selector and J button are used to navigate the camera menus.
Move cursor up
Cancel and return
to previous menu
J button
Select highlighted
item
Select
highlighted item
or display submenu
X
Move cursor down
Follow the steps below to navigate the menus.
1
Display the menus.
G button
Press the G button to display the menus.
2
Highlight the icon for the current menu.
Press 4 to highlight the icon for the current
menu.
3
Select a menu.
Press 1 or 3 to position the cursor in the
selected menu.
19
4
Position the cursor in the selected menu.
Press 2 to position the cursor in the selected
menu.
X
5
Highlight a menu item.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a menu item.
6
Display options.
Press 2 to display options for the selected menu
item.
7
Highlight an option.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an option.
8
Select the highlighted item.
Press J to select the highlighted item. To exit without
making a selection, press the G button.
Note the following:
• Menu items that are displayed in gray are not currently available.
• While pressing 2 or the center of the multi selector generally has the same effect
as pressing J, there are some cases in which selection can only be made by
pressing J.
• To exit the menus and return to shooting mode, press the shutter-release button
halfway (pg. 35).
A
Using the Command Dials
The main command dial can be used to move the cursor up and down, the sub-command dial
to move the cursor left and right. The sub-command dial can not be used to make a selection.
20
Help
If a Q icon is displayed at the bottom left corner of the monitor,
help can be displayed by pressing the L button. A
description of the currently selected option or menu will be
displayed while the button is pressed. Press 1 or 3 to scroll
through the display.
X
Q icon
L button
21
First Steps
Charge the Battery
X
The camera is powered by an EN-EL3e rechargeable Li-ion battery (supplied).
The EN-EL3e is not fully charged at shipment. To maximize shooting time, charge the
battery in the supplied MH-18a quick charger before use. About two and a quarter
hours are required to fully recharge the battery when no charge remains.
1
Plug the charger in.
Insert the AC adapter plug into the battery charger and
plug the power cable into an electrical outlet.
Remove the terminal cover.
3
Insert the battery.
Insert the battery into the charger. The CHARGE lamp will
blink while the battery charges.
22
n
io
Li-
Remove the terminal cover from the battery.
BA
TT
ER
Y
PA
CK
2
4
Remove the battery when charging is complete.
Charging is complete when the CHARGE lamp stops
blinking. Remove the battery and unplug the charger.
X
Insert the Battery
1
Turn the camera off.
Power switch
Always turn the camera off before inserting or
removing batteries.
2
Open the battery-chamber cover.
Open the battery-chamber cover on the bottom of the
camera.
3
Insert the battery.
Insert the battery as shown at right.
4
Close the battery-chamber cover.
❚❚ Removing the Battery
Before removing the battery, turn the camera off. To prevent short-circuits, replace
the terminal cover when the battery is not in use.
23
D
X
The Battery and Charger
Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages xiv–xv and 248–249 of this manual. Do not
use the battery at ambient temperatures below 0°C (32°F) or above 40°C (104°F). Charge the
battery indoors at ambient temperatures between 5–35°C (41–95°F); for best results, charge
the battery at temperatures above 20°C (68°F). Battery capacity may temporarily drop if the
battery is charged at low temperatures or used at a temperature below the temperature at
which it was charged. If the battery is charged at a temperature below 5°C (41°F), the battery
life indicator in the Battery info (pg. 208) display may show a temporary decrease.
The battery may be hot immediately after use. Wait for the battery to cool before recharging.
Use the charger with compatible batteries only. Unplug when not in use.
D
Incompatible Batteries
This camera can not be used with EN-EL3 or EN-EL3a rechargeable Li-ion batteries for the
D100, D70 series, or D50 or with the MS-D70 CR2 battery holder.
A
EN-EL3e Rechargeable Li-ion Batteries
The supplied EN-EL3e shares information with compatible devices, enabling the camera to
show battery charge state in six levels (pg. 34). The Battery info option in the setup menu
details battery charge, battery life, and the number of pictures taken since the battery was last
charged (pg. 208).
24
Attach a Lens
Care should be taken to prevent dust from entering the camera when the lens is
removed. An AF-S DX NIKKOR 18-105mm f/3.5-5.6G ED VR lens is used in this manual
for illustrative purposes.
X
Mounting index
Focal length index
Focal length scale
Lens hood (pg. 273)
CPU contacts (pg. 228)
Lens cap
Rear cover
Focus mode switch (pg. 25, 273)
Zoom ring
1
VR (vibration reduction) switch
Focus ring (pg. 59, 273)
Remove the rear lens cap and the camera body cap.
After confirming that the camera is off, remove the rear lens cap from the lens
and remove the camera body cap.
q w
2
Attach the lens.
Keeping the mounting mark on the lens
aligned with the mounting mark on the
camera body, position the lens in the
camera’s bayonet mount. Being careful
not to press the lens-release button,
rotate the lens counter-clockwise until it
clicks into place.
Mounting
index
If the lens is equipped with an A-M or M/A-M switch,
select A (autofocus) or M/A (autofocus with manual
priority).
25
❚❚ Detaching the Lens
X
Be sure the camera is off when removing or exchanging lenses.
To remove the lens, press and hold the lens release button
while turning the lens clockwise. After removing the lens,
replace the lens cap, rear cover, and camera body cap.
❚❚ Vibration Reduction (VR)
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G VR lenses support vibration reduction
(VR), which reduces blur caused by camera shake even when the camera is panned,
allowing shutter speeds to be slowed by approximately 3 EV at a focal length of
105mm (Nikon measurements; effects vary with the user and shooting conditions).
To use vibration reduction, slide the VR switch to ON.
Vibration reduction is activated when the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway, reducing the effects of camera
shake on the image in the viewfinder and simplifying the
process of framing the subject and focusing in both
autofocus and manual modes. When the camera is panned,
vibration reduction applies only to motion that is not part of
the pan (if the camera is panned horizontally, for example,
vibration reduction will be applied only to vertical shake),
making it much easier to pan the camera smoothly in a wide
arc.
Vibration reduction can be turned off by sliding the VR switch to OFF. Turn vibration
reduction off when the camera is securely mounted on a tripod, but leave it on if the
tripod head is not secured or when using a monopod.
D
CPU Lenses with Aperture Rings
In the case of CPU lenses equipped with an aperture ring (pg. 228), lock aperture at the
minimum setting (highest f-number). See the lens manual for details.
D
Vibration Reduction
Do not turn the camera off or remove the lens while vibration reduction is in effect. If power to
the lens is cut while vibration reduction is on, the lens may rattle when shaken. This is not a
malfunction, and can be corrected by reattaching the lens and turning the camera on.
Vibration reduction is disabled while the built-in flash is charging. When vibration reduction is
active, the image in the viewfinder may be blurred after the shutter is released. This does not
indicate a malfunction.
26
Basic Setup
A language-selection dialog will be displayed the first time the camera is turned on.
Choose a language and set the time and date. Note that if the time and date are not
set, B will blink in the monitor and the time and date recorded with photographs
will be incorrect.
1
Turn the camera on.
X
Power switch
A language-selection dialog will be displayed.
2
Select a language.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight the desired language and press
J.
3
Choose a time zone.
A time-zone selection dialog will be displayed. Press 4 or
2 to highlight the local time zone (the UTC field shows
the difference between the selected time zone and
Coordinated Universal Time, or UTC, in hours) and press
J.
4
Turn daylight saving time on or off.
Daylight saving time options will be displayed. Daylight
saving time is off by default; if daylight saving time is in
effect in the local time zone, press 1 to highlight On and
press J.
5
Set the date and time.
The dialog shown at right will be displayed. Press 4 or 2
to select an item, 1 or 3 to change. Press J when the
clock is set to the current date and time.
27
6
Choose a date format.
Press 1 or 3 to choose the order in which the year,
month, and day will be displayed and press J.
X
7
Exit to shooting mode.
Press the shutter-release button halfway to exit to
shooting mode.
A
The Setup Menu
Language and date/time settings can be changed at any time using the Language (pg. 204)
and World time (pg. 204) options in the setup menu.
A
The Clock Battery
The camera clock is powered by an independent, rechargeable power source, which is charged
as necessary when the main battery is installed or the camera is powered by an optional EH-5a
or EH-5 AC adapter (pg. 239). Two days of charging will power the clock for about three
months. If the B icon flashes in the control panel, the clock battery is exhausted and the
clock has been reset. Set the clock to the correct time and date.
A
The Camera Clock
The camera clock is less accurate than most watches and household clocks. Check the clock
regularly against more accurate time pieces and reset as necessary.
28
Inserting Memory Cards
The camera stores pictures on Secure Digital (SD) memory cards (available
separately).
1
Turn the camera off.
X
Power switch
Always turn the camera off before inserting or
removing memory cards.
2
Open the card slot cover.
Slide the card slot cover out (q) and open the card slot
(w).
3
Insert the memory card.
Holding the memory card as shown at right, slide it in
until it clicks into place. The memory card access lamp will
light for a few seconds. Close the memory card slot cover.
D
Inserting Memory Cards
Inserting memory cards upside down or backwards could
damage the camera or the card. Check to be sure the card is in
the correct orientation.
Front
Access lamp
If C is displayed in the control panel as shown at right,
format the card as described on the following page.
D
The Access Lamp
Do not remove the battery or disconnect the power source while the memory card access
lamp is lit. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the card.
29
❚❚ Formatting Memory Cards
Memory cards must be formatted after being used in other devices. Format the card
as described below.
X D Formatting Memory Cards
Formatting memory cards permanently deletes any data they may contain. Be sure to copy any
photographs and other data you wish to keep to a computer before proceeding (pg. 148).
1
Turn the camera on.
Power switch
2
Press the Q buttons.
O button
Z button
Hold the Q (Z and O) buttons down
simultaneously for approximately two
seconds.
A blinking C will appear in the shutterspeed displays in the control panel and
viewfinder. To exit without formatting the
memory card, wait six seconds (the default
setting) until C stops blinking or press any
button other than the Q (Z and O) buttons.
3
Press the Q buttons again.
Press the Q (Z and O) buttons together a second time while C is blinking
to format the memory card. Do not remove the memory card or remove or
disconnect the power source during formatting.
When formatting is complete, the control panel and
viewfinder will show the number of photographs that
can be recorded at current settings.
30
❚❚ Removing Memory Cards
After confirming that the access lamp is off, turn the camera off,
open the memory card slot cover, and press the card in to eject
it (q). The card can then be removed by hand (w).
X
D
Memory Cards
• Memory cards may be hot after use. Observe due caution when removing memory cards
from the camera.
• Memory cards that have been formatted in a computer or other device must be reformatted
in the camera before they can be used for recording or playback.
• Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards. Do not remove memory
cards from the camera, turn the camera off, or remove or disconnect the power source
during formatting or while data are being recorded, deleted, or copied to a computer.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to the camera
or card.
• Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects.
• Do not bend, drop, or subject to strong physical shocks.
• Do not apply force to the card casing. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the
card.
• Do not expose to water, heat, high levels of humidity, or direct sunlight.
A
No Memory Card
If no memory card is inserted, the control panel and viewfinder will
show S and an icon will appear in the viewfinder as shown at
right. If the camera is turned off with a charged EN-EL3e battery and
no memory card inserted, S will be displayed in the control panel
and an icon will be displayed in the viewfinder.
A
The Write Protect Switch
Memory cards are equipped with a write protect switch to
prevent accidental loss of data. When this switch is in the
“lock” position, photos can not be recorded or deleted and
the memory card can not be formatted. To unlock the
memory card, slide the switch to the “write” position.
Write-protect switch
A
See Also
See page 202 for information on formatting memory cards using the Format memory card
option in the setup menu.
31
Adjust Viewfinder Focus
X
The camera is equipped with diopter adjustment to accommodate individual
differences in vision. Check that the display in the viewfinder is in focus before
framing pictures in the viewfinder.
1
Remove the lens cap and turn the camera Power switch
on.
2
Focus the viewfinder.
Rotate the diopter control until the viewfinder
display and focus point are in sharp focus.
When operating the diopter control with your
eye to the viewfinder, be careful not to put your
fingers or fingernails in your eye.
Focus point
A
Eyepiece Correction Lenses
Corrective lenses (available separately; pg. 239) can be used to further adjust viewfinder
diopter.
32
sBasic Photography and Playback
This chapter outlines the basics of taking and viewing photographs in auto and scene
modes. It assumes that default camera settings are used; for information on restoring
default settings, see page 258.
“Point-and-Shoot” Photography (i and j Modes)...............................................
34
Step 1: Turn the Camera On ....................................................................................................
34
Step 2: Choose Shooting and Focus Modes......................................................................
36
Step 3: Check Camera Settings ..............................................................................................
36
Step 4: Frame the Photograph ...............................................................................................
37
Step 5: Focus.................................................................................................................................
38
Step 6: Shoot.................................................................................................................................
39
Creative Photography (Scene Modes).......................................................................
41
k Portrait .......................................................................................................................................
41
l Landscape.................................................................................................................................
41
n Close Up ....................................................................................................................................
42
m Sports .........................................................................................................................................
42
o Night Portrait...........................................................................................................................
42
Framing Pictures in the Monitor (Live View) ............................................................
43
Basic Playback................................................................................................................
48
Deleting Unwanted Photographs.........................................................................................
49
Recording and Viewing Movies (Live View)..............................................................
50
s
A
Use a CPU Lens
Auto and scene modes are only available with CPU lenses. If these modes are selected when a
non-CPU lens is attached, the shutter release will be disabled.
33
“Point-and-Shoot” Photography
(i and j Modes)
s
This section describes how to take photographs in i (auto) mode, an
automatic “point-and-shoot” mode in which the majority of settings
are controlled by the camera in response to shooting conditions, and
in which the flash will fire automatically if the subject is poorly lit. To
take photographs with the flash off while leaving the camera in
control of other settings, rotate the mode dial to j to select auto
(flash off ) mode.
Step 1: Turn the Camera On
1
Turn the camera on.
Power switch
Remove the lens cap and turn the camera on.
The control panel and viewfinder displays will
light.
2
Check the battery level.
Check the battery level in the viewfinder or control panel.
Control panel
L
K
J
I
Viewfinder
—
—
Description
Battery fully charged.
Battery partially discharged.
Low battery. Ready fully-charged spare battery or prepare to
charge battery.
H
d
Battery exhausted; shutter release disabled. Charge or
(blinks)
(blinks) exchange battery.
Note: When camera is powered by optional EH-5a or EH-5 AC adapter, battery level is not
displayed; instead, a 9 icon appears in the shooting information display (pg. 10).
H
34
d
3
Check the number of exposures remaining.
The exposure count displays in the control panel and
viewfinder show the number of photographs that
can be stored on the memory card. Check the
number of exposures remaining.
s
If there is not enough memory to store additional
photographs at current settings, the display will flash
as shown at right. No further pictures can be taken
until the memory card has been replaced (pg. 31) or
photographs have been deleted (pp. 49, 162).
A
Large-Capacity Memory Cards
When enough memory remains on the memory card to record a
thousand or more pictures at current settings, the number of
exposures remaining will be shown in thousands, rounded down
to the nearest hundred (e.g., if there is room for 1,260 exposures,
the exposure count display will show 1.2 K).
A
Auto Meter Off
At default settings, the viewfinder and the shutter speed and aperture displays in the control
panel will turn off if no operations are performed for about six seconds (auto meter off),
reducing the drain on the battery. Press the shutter-release button halfway to reactivate the
display in the viewfinder (pg. 38).
6s
Exposure meters on Exposure meters off
Exposure meters on
The length of time before the exposure meters turn off automatically can be adjusted using
Custom Setting c2 (Auto meter-off delay, pg. 179).
A
Camera Off Display
If the camera is turned off with a battery and memory card inserted, the
frame count and number of exposures remaining will be displayed (some
memory cards may only display this information when the camera is on).
35
Step 2: Choose Shooting and Focus Modes
1
Select i or j mode.
Mode dial
To take photographs without the flash, rotate
the mode dial to j. Otherwise, rotate the mode
dial to i.
s
2
Select autofocus.
Focus-mode selector
Rotate the focus-mode selector to AF
(autofocus).
Step 3: Check Camera Settings
Check settings in the control panel. The default settings for i and j mode are listed
below.
AF-area mode
Flash mode
Autofocus mode
Release mode
Image size
Image quality
Option
Description
Page
If the subject is poorly lit, the flash will pop up
automatically when the shutter-release button is
70
pressed halfway and fire when the picture is taken.
Flash mode
(i mode)
o
Flash mode
(j mode)
j (flash off )
Flash will not fire even when lighting is poor.
NORM
(JPEG Normal)
L (Large)
8
(Single frame)
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of
roughly 1 : 8. Ideal for snapshots.
Images are 4,288 × 2,848 pixels in size.
One picture is taken each time the shutter-release
button is pressed.
The camera automatically selects single-servo
autofocus if the subject is stationary, continuousservo autofocus if the subject is in motion. No
picture will be taken if the camera is unable to
focus.
The camera automatically selects the focus point.
Image quality
Image size
Release mode
36
Default
Autofocus mode
4
(Auto select)
AF-area mode
Auto-area
71
62
63
64
54
173
Step 4: Frame the Photograph
1
Ready the camera.
When framing photographs in the viewfinder, hold the
handgrip in your right hand and cradle the camera body
or lens with your left. Keep your elbows propped lightly
against your torso for support and place one foot half a
pace ahead of the other to keep your upper body stable.
In j mode, shutter speeds slow when lighting is poor; use
of a tripod is recommended.
s
Hold the camera as shown at right when framing
photographs in portrait (tall) orientation.
For information on framing photographs in the monitor in live view mode, see
page 43.
2
Frame the photograph.
Frame a photograph in the viewfinder with the
main subject in at least one of the eleven focus
points.
Focus point
A
Using a Zoom Lens
Use the zoom ring to zoom in on the subject so that it fills a
larger area of the frame, or zoom out to increase the area visible
in the final photograph (select longer focal lengths on the lens
focal length scale index to zoom in, shorter focal lengths to
zoom out).
Zoom in
Zoom ring
Zoom out
37
Step 5: Focus
1
s
Press the shutter-release button halfway.
Press the shutter-release button halfway to focus. The camera will
select the focus points automatically. If the subject is poorly lit, the
flash may pop up and the AF-assist illuminator may light.
2
Check the indicators in the viewfinder.
When the focus operation is complete, the
selected focus points will be briefly highlighted, a
beep will sound, and the in-focus indicator (J) will
appear in the viewfinder. If the camera chooses
single-servo autofocus (pg. 54), focus will lock
while the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway.
In-focus
indicator
Buffer
capacity
In-focus indicator
Description
J
Subject in focus.
Camera unable to focus using
J (blinks)
autofocus. See page 55.
While the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the
number of exposures that can be stored in the memory
buffer (“t”; pg. 65) will be displayed in the viewfinder.
A
The Shutter-Release Button
The camera has a two-stage shutter-release button. The camera focuses when the shutterrelease button is pressed halfway. To take the photograph, press the shutter-release button
the rest of the way down.
38
Step 6: Shoot
Smoothly press the shutter-release button the rest
of the way down to release the shutter and record
the photograph. The access lamp next to the
memory card slot cover will light. Do not eject the
memory card or remove or disconnect the power
source until the lamp has gone out and recording is
complete.
Access lamp
s
❚❚ Turning the Camera Off
Turn the camera off when shooting is complete.
Power switch
A
Camera Off Display
If the camera is turned off with a battery and memory card inserted, the
number of exposures remaining will be displayed in the control panel.
A
Auto (Flash off) Mode
Choose this mode where flash photography is prohibited, when photographing infants, or to
capture natural lighting under low light conditions.
i mode
j mode
39
A
s
The Built-in Flash
If additional lighting is required for correct exposure in i mode, the
built-in flash will pop up automatically when the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway. Flash range varies with aperture and ISO
sensitivity (pg. 266); remove lens hoods when using the flash. If the
flash is raised, photographs can only be taken when the flash-ready
indicator (M) is displayed. If the flash-ready indicator is not displayed,
the flash is charging; remove your finger briefly from the shutterrelease button and try again.
To save battery power when the flash is not in use, return it to its closed
position by pressing it gently downward till the latch clicks into place.
For more information on using the flash, see page 70.
40
Creative Photography (Scene Modes)
The camera offers a choice of six “scene” modes. Selecting a program
automatically optimizes settings to suit the selected scene, making
creative photography as easy as rotating the mode dial.
Mode
k Portrait
l Landscape
n Close up
m Sports
o Night portrait
Description
For portraits.
For natural and man-made landscapes in daylight or at night.
For close up shots of flowers, insects, and other small objects.
For moving subjects.
For portraits taken under low light.
s
To take photographs in scene modes:
1
Select the desired mode.
Mode dial
Rotate the mode dial to select a scene mode.
2
Take photographs.
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
k Portrait
Use for portraits with soft, natural-looking skin tones. If the
subject is far from the background or a telephoto lens is used,
background details will be softened to lend the composition a
sense of depth.
l Landscape
Use for vivid landscape shots in daylight or at night. The builtin flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off automatically. Use of
a tripod is recommended to prevent blur when lighting is
poor.
41
s
n Close Up
Use for close-up shots of flowers, insects, and other small
objects (a macro lens can be used to focus at very close
ranges). The camera automatically focuses on the subject in
the center focus point. Use of a tripod is recommended to
prevent blur.
m Sports
High shutter speeds freeze motion for dynamic sports shots in
which the main subject stands out clearly. The built-in flash
and AF-assist illuminator turn off automatically.
o Night Portrait
Use for a natural balance between the main subject and the
background in portraits taken under low light. Use of a tripod
is recommended to prevent blur.
A
Focus Point
At default settings, the camera selects the focus point as follows:
• k, l, and o modes: The camera selects the focus point automatically.
• n mode: The camera focuses on the subject in the center focus point. Other focus points can
be selected with the multi selector (pg. 56).
• m mode: The camera focuses continuously while the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway, tracking the subject in the center focus point. If the subject leaves the center focus
point, the camera will continue to focus based on information from the other focus points.
The starting focus point can be selected with the multi selector (pg. 56).
A
The Built-in Flash
If additional lighting is required for correct exposure in k, n, or o mode, the built-in flash will
pop automatically when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
42
Framing Pictures in the Monitor
(Live View)
Press the a button to frame pictures in the monitor.
1
Press the a button.
a button
s
The mirror will be raised and the view through the lens
will be displayed in the camera monitor. The subject will
no longer be visible in the viewfinder.
Item
q Shooting mode
w Time remaining
e
r
t
y
u
“No movie” icon
Autofocus mode
Image size
Image quality
White balance
Audio recording
i indicator
Time remaining
o (movie mode)
Description
The mode currently selected with the mode dial.
Page
34, 41,
78
The amount of time remaining before live view ends
automatically. Displayed if shooting will end in 30 s or less.
Indicates that movies can not be recorded.
The current autofocus mode.
The option currently selected for image size.
The option currently selected for image quality.
The option currently selected for white balance.
50
44
63
62
95
Indicates whether sound is being recorded with movies.
170
The recording time remaining in movie mode.
50
To adjust monitor brightness, press the K button during
!0 Monitor brightness live view.
46
44
A
Before Selecting Live View
Note that metering can not be changed in live view mode. Choose a metering method before
selecting live view mode.
43
2
Choose an autofocus mode.
Press the B button and rotate the command
dial until one of the following autofocus modes
is displayed in the monitor (note that these
autofocus modes differ from those available in
other shooting modes):
s
Mode
Description
The camera automatically detects
Face
8
and focuses on portrait subjects
priority
facing the camera. Use for portraits.
Use for hand-held shots of landscapes
Wide area and other non-portrait subjects. The
9
(default) focus point can be selected using the
multi selector.
Use for pin-point focus on a selected
Normal
!
spot in the frame. A tripod is
area
recommended.
3
B button Main command
dial
Exit
Monitor
Check the view in the monitor.
To magnify the view in the monitor and check focus, press the X button.
X button
Exit
Press X to zoom in up to a maximum of 6.7 ×, or press W to zoom out. While
the view through the lens is zoomed in, a navigation window will appear in a
gray frame at the bottom right corner of the display. Use the multi selector to
scroll to areas of the frame not visible in the monitor. Press the J button to
start recording (pg. 50).
A
Monitor Brightness
Monitor brightness can be adjusted by pressing the K button while the view through the
monitor is displayed. Press 1 or 3 to adjust brightness (note that monitor brightness has no
effect on pictures taken in live view mode). To return to live view, release the K button.
44
4
Choose the focus point.
Wide and normal area autofocus: Rotate the focus
Focus selector lock
selector lock to “J” and use the multi selector to
move the focus point to any point in the frame.
Return the focus selector lock to “L” when
selection is complete.
s
Exit
Focus point
Face-priority autofocus: A double yellow border will
be displayed when the camera detects a portrait
subject facing the camera (if multiple faces, up
to a maximum of five, are detected, the camera
will focus on the closest subject).
Manual focus: Use the multi selector to choose the
focus point for electronic rangefinding (pg. 59)
as described for wide and normal area
autofocus, above.
5
Exit
Focus point
Focus.
Autofocus: In wide and normal area autofocus, the
camera will focus while the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway. In face-priority
autofocus, the camera sets focus and exposure
Exit
for the face in the double yellow border while
the shutter-release button is pressed halfway; if
the camera can no longer detect the subject
(because, for example, the subject has looked
away), borders will no longer be displayed. The
Exit
focus point will blink green and the monitor
may brighten or darken while the camera
focuses. If the camera is able to focus, the focus point will be displayed in green;
if the camera is unable to focus, the focus point will blink red. Note that pictures
can be taken even when the focus point blinks red, and that single-servo
autofocus is used regardless of the option selected for autofocus mode (pg. 54).
Check focus in the monitor before shooting.
45
Manual focus: Focus using the lens focusing ring.
s
6
Take the picture.
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to take
pictures in the current release mode (pg. 64). The monitor will turn
off. When shooting is complete, the photograph will be displayed in the
monitor for 4 s or until the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. The
camera will then return to live view mode.
7
Exit live view mode.
Press the a button to exit live view mode.
D
Shooting in Live View Mode
Although they will not appear in the final picture, banding or distortion may be visible in the
monitor under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps or if the camera is panned
horizontally or an object moves at high speed through frame. Bright light sources may leave
after-images in the monitor when the camera is panned. Bright spots may also appear. When
shooting in live view mode, avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light sources.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera’s internal circuitry.
The effects of aperture on depth of field can not be previewed in live view mode but are visible
in the final photograph.
Live view shooting ends automatically if the lens is removed.
Live view mode can be used for up to an hour. Note, however, that
when used in live view mode for extended periods, the temperature of
the camera’s internal circuits may rise, resulting in image noise and
unusual colors (the camera may also become noticeably warm, but this
does not indicated a malfunction). To prevent damage to the camera’s
Exit
internal circuits, live view shooting will end automatically before the
camera overheats. A count-down display will appear in the monitor
30 s before shooting ends. At high ambient temperatures, this display may appear
immediately when live view mode is selected.
To reduce blur when using a tripod, choose On for Custom Setting d10 (Exposure delay
mode).
A
Exposure Lock and Exposure Compensation
Exposure can be locked by pressing the AE-L/AF-L button (pg. 88) or (in P, S, A, and M modes)
altered using exposure compensation (pg. 90). The effects of exposure compensation are
visible in the monitor during live view.
46
D
Face-Priority AF
The camera’s ability to detect faces depends on a variety of factors, including whether or not
the subject is facing the camera. The camera may be unable to detect subjects that are not
facing the camera or faces that are hidden by sunglasses or other obstructions or that take up
too much or too little of the frame. If no face is detected when the shutter-release button is
pressed halfway, the camera will focus on the subject in the center of the frame.
The camera will continue to focus until a face is detected or the shutter-release button is
pressed halfway. If a flashing double red border is displayed, the camera is unable to focus;
recompose the picture and try again.
s
D
Using Autofocus in Live View
Autofocus is slower in live view. The camera may be unable to focus in the following situations:
• The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame
• The subject lacks contrast
• The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness, or the
subject is lit by spot lighting or by a neon sign or other light source that changes in
brightness
• A cross (star) filter or other special filter is used
• The subject appears smaller than the focus point
• The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns (e.g., windows in a skyscraper)
• The subject is moving
Note that the focus point may sometimes be displayed in green when the camera is unable to
focus.
Use an AF-S lens. The desired results may not be achieved with other lenses or teleconverters.
A
The Shooting Information Display
To hide or display indicators in the monitor in live view mode, press the R button.
Exit
Shooting information
on
Framing guides
(zoom not available)
Shooting information
off
A
HDMI
When the camera is attached to an HDMI video device, the
camera monitor will turn off and the video device will display
the view through the lens as shown at right.
Exit
47
Basic Playback
At default settings, photographs are automatically displayed for about 4 s after
shooting. If no photograph is displayed in the monitor, the most recent picture can
be viewed by pressing the K button.
s
1
Press the K button.
A photograph will be displayed in the monitor.
K button
2
View additional pictures.
Additional pictures can be displayed by
pressing 4 or 2. To view additional information
on the current photograph, press 1 and 3
(pg. 129).
N I KON D90
1 / 12
To end playback and return to shooting mode,
press the shutter-release button halfway.
1/ 250
AUTO
F11
100NCD90 DSC_0001. JPG
15/09/2008 10: 15: 29
48
200
35mm
0, 0
NOR
ORMAL
AL
4288x2848
Deleting Unwanted Photographs
To delete the photograph currently displayed in the monitor, press the O button.
Note that photographs can not be recovered once deleted.
1
Display the photograph.
Display the photograph you wish to delete as described on the previous page.
K button
2
s
Delete the photograph.
Press the O button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed.
O button
Press the O button again to delete the image and return to playback. To exit
without deleting the picture, press K.
A
Delete
To delete multiple images, use the Delete option in the playback menu (pg. 162).
49
Recording and Viewing Movies
(Live View)
Movies up to 2 GB in size can be recorded in live view mode. Before recording,
choose frame size and sound options in the Movie settings menu (pg. 170).
s
1
Press the a button.
a button
The mirror will be raised and the view through the lens
will be displayed in the camera monitor. The subject will
no longer be visible in the viewfinder.
D The 0 Icon
A 0 icon (pg. 43) will be displayed if there is insufficient space
on the memory card to record movies.
2
Focus.
Frame the opening shot and press the shutter-release button halfway to focus
on your subject.
3
Start recording.
Recording indicator
Press the J button to start recording (at default
settings, both video and sound be recorded; do
not cover the microphone on the front of the
camera during recording). The recording time
available is displayed in the monitor, together
with a recording indicator. Exposure can be
Time remaining
locked by pressing the AE-L/AF-L button (pg. 88)
or (in P, S, A, and M modes) altered using exposure compensation (pg. 90). Note
that camera will not focus if the shutter-release button is pressed halfway
during recording.
4
End recording.
To end recording, press the J button (to end
recording and take a still picture in the mode
currently selected with the mode dial, press the
shutter-release button all the way down).
Recording will end automatically when the
maximum size is reached or the memory card is full.
D
Exit
Maximum Size
Movie files can be up to 2 GB in size. The maximum length is 5 min for movies with a
frame size of 1280 × 720, 20 min for other movies; note that depending on memory card
write speed, shooting may end before this length is reached.
50
D
Recording Movies
Banding or distortion may be visible in the monitor and in the final movie under fluorescent,
mercury vapor, or sodium lamps or if the camera is panned horizontally or an object moves at
high speed through frame. Bright light sources may leave after-images when the camera is
panned. Jagged edges, false colors, moiré, and bright spots may also appear. When recording
movies, avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light sources. Failure to observe
this precaution could result in damage to the camera’s internal circuitry.
Recording ends automatically if the lens is removed.
s
Live view can be used to record movies for up to an hour. Note,
however, that when used in live view mode for extended periods, the
temperature of the camera’s internal circuits may rise, resulting in
image noise and unusual colors (the camera may also become
noticeably warm, but this does not indicated a malfunction). To
prevent damage to the camera’s internal circuits, recording will end
automatically before the camera overheats. A count-down display will
appear in the monitor 30 s before shooting ends. At high ambient temperatures, this display
may appear immediately when live view mode is selected.
Autofocus is not available when recording movies. Matrix metering is used regardless of the
metering method selected.
51
❚❚ Viewing Movies
Movies are indicated by a 1 icon in full-frame playback (pg. 128). The following
operations can be performed while a movie is displayed:
Movie
indicator
Time
remaining
s
Audio
indicator
To
Start/pause/
resume
Use
Description
J
Press J to start, pause, or resume playback.
Press 4 or 2 to rewind or fast forward. While playback is
paused, press 4 or 2 to rewind or advance one frame.
Advance/
rewind
Adjust volume
X/ W
Exit to shooting
mode
Display menus
Return to fullframe playback
52
Press X to increase volume, W to decrease.
Monitor will turn off. Photographs can be taken immediately.
G
See page 159 for more information.
/K Press the selector up or press K to exit to full-frame playback.
hMore on Photography (All Modes)
This and the following two chapters build on the Tutorial to cover more advanced
shooting and playback options.
h
Focus ................................................................................................................................
54
Autofocus.......................................................................................................................................
54
Focus Point Selection ................................................................................................................
56
Focus Lock .....................................................................................................................................
57
Manual Focus................................................................................................................................
59
Image Quality and Size.................................................................................................
61
Image Quality...............................................................................................................................
62
Image Size......................................................................................................................................
63
Release Mode .................................................................................................................
64
Continuous Mode .......................................................................................................................
65
Self-Timer Mode ($)...................................................................................................................
66
Using an Optional Remote Control (#) ................................................................................
68
Using the Built-in Flash ................................................................................................
70
Flash Mode ....................................................................................................................................
71
ISO Sensitivity ................................................................................................................
74
Two-Button Reset ..........................................................................................................
75
53
Focus
Focus can be adjusted automatically (see “Autofocus,” below) or manually (pg. 59).
The user can also select the focus point for automatic or manual focus (pg. 59) or use
focus lock to focus to recompose photographs after focusing (pg. 57).
Autofocus
h
When the focus mode selector is set to AF, the camera Focus mode selector
focuses automatically when the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway. In single-point AF, a beep
will sound when the camera focuses. No beep will
sound when AF-A is selected in m (sports) mode or
when continuous-servo autofocus is used (note that
continuous-servo autofocus may be selected
automatically when shooting moving subjects in AF-A autofocus mode).
With lenses that offers A-M selection, select A when using autofocus. With lenses that
support M/A (autofocus with manual priority), select M/A. If the lens does not support
autofocus or the camera is unable to focus using autofocus, use manual focus
(pg. 59).
❚❚ Autofocus Mode
The following autofocus modes are available when the focus mode selector is set to
AF:
Autofocus mode
Description
Camera automatically selects single-servo autofocus when
Auto select
AF-A
subject is stationary, continuous-servo autofocus when subject is
(default setting)
moving. Shutter can only be released if camera is able to focus.
For stationary subjects. Focus locks when shutter-release button
AF-S Single-servo AF
is pressed halfway. Shutter can only be released when in-focus
indicator is displayed.
For moving subjects. Camera focuses continuously while
AF-C Continuous-servo AF shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Photographs can be
taken even when in-focus indicator is not displayed.
To choose the autofocus mode, press the B button. The focus mode changes each
time the B button is pressed.
B button
54
Main command dial
Control panel
A
Getting Good Results with Autofocus
Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed below. The shutter release may
be disabled if the camera is unable to focus under these conditions, or the in-focus indicator
(J) may be displayed and the camera may sound a beep, allowing the shutter to be released
even when the subject is not in focus. In these cases, rotate the focus mode selector to M and
use manual focus (pg. 59), or use focus lock (pg. 57) to focus on another subject at the same
distance and then recompose the photograph.
D
There is little or no contrast
between the subject and the
background.
Example: Subject is the same
color as the background.
The focus point contains
areas of sharply contrasting
brightness.
Example: Subject is half in
the shade.
The focus point contains
objects at different distances
from the camera.
Example: Subject is inside a
cage.
Background objects appear
larger than the subject.
Example: a building is in the
frame behind the subject.
The subject is dominated by
regular geometric patterns.
Example: A row of windows
in a skyscraper.
The subject contains many
fine details.
Example: A field of flowers or
other subjects that are
small or lack variation in
brightness.
The AF-Assist Illuminator
If the subject is poorly lit, the AF-assist illuminator will light
automatically to assist the autofocus operation when the shutterrelease button is pressed halfway. The AF-assist illuminator will not
light in l, or m modes or if Off has been selected for Custom Setting
a3 (Built-in AF-assist illuminator; pg. 174). The illuminator has a
range of about 0.5–3.0 m (1 ft. 8 in.–9 ft. 10 in.); when using the
illuminator, use a lens with a focal length of 24–200 mm and remove
the lens hood.
h
AF-assist illuminator
A
See Also
Custom Setting d1 (Beep; pg. 180) can be used to turn the beep speaker on or off.
55
Focus Point Selection
The camera offers a choice of eleven focus points that together cover a wide area of
the frame. At the default settings, the camera chooses the focus point automatically
or focuses on subject in the center focus point. The focus point can also be selected
manually to compose photographs with the main subject positioned almost
anywhere in the frame.
1
Choose single- or dynamic-area AF.
At default settings, the focus point is selected
automatically in i, j, k, l, o, P, S, A, and M modes. To
enable manual focus-point selection in these modes,
select Single point, Dynamic area, or 3D-tracking (11
points) for Custom Setting a1 (AF-area mode; pg. 173).
h
2
Set the focus selector lock to “J“.
Focus selector lock
Set the focus selector lock to the “J” position.
This allows the multi selector to be used to
select the focus point.
3
Select the focus point.
Use the multi selector to select the focus point
in the viewfinder or control panel while the
exposure meters are active (pg. 35). The focus
selector lock can be returned to the “L” (locked)
position following selection to prevent the
selected focus point from changing when the
multi selector is pressed.
A
See Also
Custom Setting a1 (AF-area mode; pg. 173) controls how the camera selects the focus point.
Custom Setting a2 (Center focus point; pg. 174) controls the size of the center focus point.
Custom Setting a4 (AF point illumination; 175) controls whether the active focus point is
highlighted in the viewfinder.
56
Focus Lock
Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing, making it possible
to focus on a subject that will not be in a focus point in the final composition. It can
also be used when the autofocus system is unable to focus (pg. 55). Focus lock is
most effective when Single point, Dynamic area, or 3D-tracking (11 points) is
selected for Custom Setting a1 (AF-area mode; pg. 173).
1
Focus.
Position the subject in the selected focus point
and press the shutter-release button halfway to
initiate focus. Check that the in-focus indicator
(J) appears in the viewfinder.
2
h
Lock focus.
AF-A and AF-C autofocus modes (pg. 54): With the
shutter-release button pressed halfway (q),
press the AE-L/AF-L button (w) to lock both focus
and exposure (an AE-L icon will be displayed in
the viewfinder). Focus will remain locked while
the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed, even if you later
remove your finger from the shutter-release
button.
Shutter-release button
AE-L/AF-L button
AF-S autofocus mode (pg. 54): Focus will lock automatically when the in-focus
indicator appears, and remain locked until you remove your finger from the
shutter-release button. Focus can also be locked by pressing the AE-L/AF-L
button (see above).
3
Recompose the photograph and shoot.
Focus will remain locked between shots if you
keep the AE-L/AF-L button pressed (AF-A/AF-C) or
the shutter-release button pressed halfway
(AF-S), allowing several photographs in
succession to be taken at the same focus
setting.
57
Do not change the distance between the camera and the subject while focus lock is
in effect. If the subject moves, focus again at the new distance.
h
A
Continuous Mode (pg. 65)
Use the AE-L/AF-L button to lock focus in continuous mode.
A
See Also
Custom Setting f4 (Assign AE-L/AF-L Button; pg. 200) controls the behavior of the AE-L/AF-L
button.
58
Manual Focus
Manual focus is available for lenses that do not support autofocus (non-AF Nikkor
lenses) or when autofocus does not produce the desired results (pg. 55). To use
manual focus, set the camera focus-mode selector and/or the lens focus-mode
switch as follows:
• AF-S lenses: Set the lens focus-mode switch to M.
h
• AF lenses: Set the both the camera focus-mode
selector and the lens focus-mode switch to M.
• Manual focus lenses: Set the camera focus-mode
switch to M.
Focus-mode selector
To focus manually, adjust the lens focusing ring until
the image displayed on the clear matte field in the
viewfinder is in focus. Photographs can be taken at
any time, even when the image is not in focus.
D
Using Manual Focus with AF Lenses
Be sure the camera focus-mode selector is set to M when using manual focus with AF lenses.
Focusing manually with the focus-mode selector set to AF could damage the lens.
A
AF-S DX Nikkor 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G VR Lenses (pg. 273)
Like other AF-S lenses, the AF-S DX Nikkor 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G VR lens used in this manual
for illustrative purposes can be used for manual focus simply by setting the lens focus-mode
switch to M.
59
❚❚ The Electronic Rangefinder
h
If the lens has a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster, the
viewfinder focus indicator can be used to confirm whether the
subject in the selected focus point is in focus (the focus point
can be selected from any of the 11 focus points). After
positioning the subject in the selected focus point, press the
shutter-release button halfway and rotate the lens focusing
ring until the in-focus indicator (I) is displayed. Note that with
the subjects listed on page 55, the in-focus indicator may
sometimes be displayed when the subject is not in focus;
confirm focus in the viewfinder before shooting.
A
Focal Plane Position
To determine the distance between your subject and the
camera, measure from the focal plane mark on the camera
body. The distance between the lens mounting flange and
the focal plane is 46.5 mm (1.83 in.).
46.5mm
Focal plane mark
60
Image Quality and Size
Together, image quality and size determine how much space each photograph
occupies on the memory card. Larger, higher quality images can be printed at larger
sizes but also require more memory, meaning that fewer such images can be stored
on the memory card.
Image Quality and Size
Large file size
h
JPEG fine
High<Image quality>Low
JPEG normal
JPEG basic
Small file size
S
M
Small<Image size >Large
L
Changes to image quality and size are reflected in the number of exposures
remaining as displayed in the control panel and viewfinder (pg. 35).
A
File Names
Photographs are stored as image files with names of the form “DSC_nnnn.xxx,” where nnnn is a
four-digit number between 0001 and 9999 assigned automatically in ascending order by the
camera, and xxx is one of the following three letter extensions: “NEF” for NEF images or “JPG”
for JPEG images. The NEF and JPEG files recorded at a setting of “NEF+JPEG” have the same file
names but different extensions. Small copies created with the small picture option in the
retouch menu have file names beginning with “SSC_” and ending with the extension “.JPG”
(e.g., “SSC_0001.JPG”), while images recorded with the other options in the retouch menu have
file names beginning with “CSC” (e.g., “CSC_0001. JPG”). Images recorded at a Shooting menu
> Color space > Adobe RGB (pg. 167) have names that begin with an underscore (e.g.,
“_DSC0001.JPG”).
61
Image Quality
The camera supports the following image quality options (listed in descending order
by image quality and file size):
Option
NEF (RAW)
h
JPEG fine
JPEG normal
(default)
JPEG basic
NEF (RAW) +
JPEG fine
NEF (RAW) +
JPEG normal
NEF (RAW) +
JPEG basic
File type
Description
Raw 12-bit data from the image sensor are saved directly to the memory
card. Choose for images that will be processed on a computer. JPEG
NEF copies of NEF (RAW) images can be created using the NEF (RAW)
processing option in the retouch menu (pg. 220) or software such as
ViewNX (supplied) or Capture NX 2 (available separately; pg. 240).
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 4 (fine image
quality).
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 8 (normal
JPEG
image quality).
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 16 (basic image
quality).
Two images are recorded: one NEF (RAW) image and one fine-quality
JPEG image.
NEF/ Two images are recorded: one NEF (RAW) image and one normal-quality
JPEG JPEG image.
Two images are recorded: one NEF (RAW) image and one basic-quality
JPEG image.
Image quality can be set by pressing the X (QUAL) button and rotating the main
command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel. Image
quality can also be adjusted from the shooting menu (pg. 165).
X (QUAL) button Main command dial
Control panel
A
NEF (RAW) Images
Note that the option selected for image size does not affect the size of NEF (RAW) images.
When opened in software such as Capture NX 2 (available separately) or ViewNX (supplied),
NEF (RAW) images have the dimensions given for large (L-size) images.
A
NEF (RAW)/NEF+JPEG
When photographs taken at NEF (RAW) + JPEG Fine, NEF (RAW) + JPEG Normal, or NEF
(RAW) + JPEG Basic are viewed on the camera, only the JPEG image will be displayed. When
photographs taken at these settings are deleted, both NEF and JPEG images will be deleted.
White balance bracketing (pg. 191) is not available when an NEF (RAW) + JPEG option is
selected for image quality. Selecting an NEF (RAW) + JPEG option cancels white balance
bracketing.
62
Image Size
Image size is measured in pixels. The following options are available.
Image size
Size (pixels)
Approximate size when printed at 200 dpi *
L (default)
4,288 × 2,848
54.5 × 36.2 cm (21.4 × 14.2 in.)
M
3,216 × 2,136
40.8 × 27.1 cm (16.1 × 10.7 in.)
S
2,144 × 1,424
27.2 × 18.1 cm (10.7 × 7.1 in.)
* Approximate size when printed at 200 dpi. Print size in inches equals image size in pixels
divided by printer resolution in dots per inch (dpi; 1 inch = approximately 2.54 cm). Print
size decreases as printer resolution increases.
Image size can be set by pressing the X (QUAL) button and rotating the sub-command
dial until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel. Image size can also be
adjusted from the shooting menu (pg. 165).
X (QUAL) button
Sub-command dial
h
Control panel
Note that the option selected for image size does not affect the size of NEF (RAW)
images. When viewed on a computer, NEF images are 4,288 × 2,848 pixels in size.
63
Release Mode
Release mode determines how the camera takes photographs: one at a time, in a
continuous sequence, with a timed shutter-release delay, or with a remote control.
Mode
h
Description
Camera takes one photograph each time shutter-release button is
8 Single frame
pressed. Access lamp will light while photo is recorded; next shot can
be taken immediately if enough space remains in memory buffer.
Camera records 1–4 frames per second while shutter-release button is
Continuous low
!
held down (pg. 65). * Frame rate can be chosen with Custom Setting d6
speed
(CL mode shooting speed; pg. 182).
Continuous
Camera records up to 4.5 frames per second while shutter-release
9
high speed
button is held down (pg. 65). *
Use for self-portraits or to reduce blurring caused by camera shake
$ Self-timer
(pg. 66).
" Delayed remote Optional ML-L3 remote control required. Use for self-portraits (pg. 68).
Optional ML-L3 remote control required. Use to reduce blurring
# Quick-response
caused by remote camera shake (pg. 68).
* Average frame rate with an EN-EL3e battery, manual focus, manual or shutter-priority auto
exposure, a shutter speed of 1/250 s or faster, other settings (with the exception of Custom
Setting d6 in the case of continuous low speed mode) at default values, and memory
remaining in memory buffer.
To choose the release mode, press the I button and rotate the main command dial
until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel.
I button
Main command dial
Control panel
A
The Memory Buffer
The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage, allowing shooting to
continue while photographs are being saved to the memory card. Up to 100 photographs can
be taken in succession; note, however, that frame rate will drop when the buffer is full.
While photographs are being recorded to the memory card, the access lamp next to the
memory card slot will light. Depending on the number of the images in the buffer, recording
may take from a few seconds to a few minutes. Do not remove the memory card or remove or
disconnect the power source until the access lamp has gone out. If the camera is switched off
while data remain in the buffer, the power will not turn off until all images in the buffer have
been recorded. If the battery is exhausted while images remain in the buffer, the shutter
release will be disabled and the images transferred to the memory card.
64
Continuous Mode
To take pictures in ! (continuous low speed) and 9 (continuous high speed)
modes:
1
Select ! or 9 mode.
Press the I button and rotate the main command dial until the desired setting
is displayed in the control panel.
h
I button
2
Main command dial
Control panel
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
While the shutter-release button is pressed all the way down, pictures
will be taken at up to 4.5 fps in continuous high speed mode, or at the
frame rate selected for Custom Setting d6 (CL mode shooting speed, pg. 182)
in continuous low speed mode.
A
Buffer Size
The approximate number of images that can be stored in the
memory buffer at current settings is shown in the exposure-count
displays in the viewfinder and control panel while the shutter-release
button is pressed. The illustration at right shows the display when
space remains in the buffer for about 21 pictures.
A
Auto Image Rotation
The camera orientation recorded for the first shot applies to all images in the same burst, even
if the camera is rotated during shooting. See “Auto Image Rotation” (pg. 205).
A
See Also
For information on the number of photographs that can be taken in a single burst, see page
262.
65
Self-Timer Mode ($)
The self-timer can be used to reduce camera shake or for self-portraits.
1
Mount the camera on a tripod.
Mount the camera on a tripod or place the camera on a stable, level surface.
2
Select $ mode.
Press the I button and rotate the main command dial until $ is displayed in
the control panel.
h
I button
3
Main command dial
Control panel
Frame the photograph.
Frame the photograph. Before taking a photograph with the flash in P, S, A, or M
modes (pg. 78), press the M button to raise the flash and wait for the M indicator
to be displayed in the viewfinder (pg. 70). The timer will stop if the flash is
raised after the timer has started.
D
Cover the Viewfinder
After framing the photograph, remove the
viewfinder eyepiece cup and insert the
supplied DK-5 eyepiece cap as shown. This
prevents light entering via the viewfinder
interfering with exposure.
66
DK-5 eyepiece cap
4
Start the timer.
Press the shutter-release button halfway to
focus, and then press the button the rest of the
way down to start the self-timer. The self-timer
lamp will start to blink and a beep will begin to sound. Two seconds before the
photograph is taken, the self-timer lamp will stop blinking and the beeping will
become more rapid. At default settings, the shutter will be released ten
seconds after the timer starts.
The timer will not start if the camera is unable to focus or in other situations in
which the shutter can not be released.
h
The self-timer can be cancelled by selecting another release mode. Turning the
camera off cancels self-timer mode and restores single frame or continuous mode.
D
Bulb
In self-timer mode, a shutter speed of A is equivalent to approximately 1/10 s.
A
See Also
For information on changing the timer duration and choosing the number of shots taken, see
Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer, pg. 179). For information on setting a beep to sound as the
timer counts down, see Custom Setting d1 (Beep, pg. 180).
67
Using an Optional Remote Control (#)
Use the optional ML-L3 remote control for self-portraits (pg. 241) or to operate the
camera remotely.
D
Before Using the Remote Control
Before using the remote control for the first time, remove the clear plastic battery insulator
sheet.
1
Mount the camera on a tripod.
Mount the camera on a tripod or place the camera on a stable, level surface.
h
2
Select " or # mode.
Press the I button and rotate the main command dial to select one of the
following modes:
I button
Main command dial
Mode
" Delayed remote
# Quick-response remote
Control panel
Description
Shutter released about 2 s after remote shutter-release
button is pressed.
Shutter released when remote shutter-release button is
pressed.
The camera will enter stand-by mode. At default settings, single frame or
continuous mode will be restored if no operations are performed for about a
minute.
3
Frame the photograph.
Frame the photograph. If autofocus is in effect, the camera shutter-release
button can be used to set focus, although only the shutter-release button on
the remote control can be used to release the shutter.
68
4
Cover the viewfinder
DK-5 eyepiece cap
After framing the photograph,
remove the viewfinder eyepiece cup
and insert the supplied DK-5
eyepiece cap as shown. This
prevents light entering via the
viewfinder interfering with exposure.
5
Take the photograph.
h
Aim the transmitter on the ML-L3 at the infrared
receiver on the camera and press the shutter-release
button on the ML-L3. In delayed remote mode, the selftimer lamp will light for about two seconds before the
shutter is released. In quick-response remote mode, the self-timer lamp will
flash after the shutter has been released. In AF-A or AF-S is selected in autofocus
modes (pg. 54), the camera will return to stand-by mode without releasing the
shutter if unable to focus. The camera will release the shutter without focusing
in manual focus mode, if AF-C is selected in autofocus mode, or if the camera has
already been focused using the camera shutter-release button (see step 3).
Remote control mode can be cancelled by selecting another release mode. Singleframe or continuous mode will be restored if the camera is turned off or no
operations are about one minute.
D
Using the Built-in Flash
If the flash is required, the camera will only respond to the shutter-release button on the ML-L3
once the flash has charged. In i, k, n, and o modes, the flash will begin charging when
delayed remote or quick-response remote mode is selected; once the flash is charged, it will
automatically pop up and fire if required when the shutter-release button on the ML-L3 is
pressed. In P, S, A, and M modes, raising the flash during the two-second count-down in delayed
remote mode will cancel the two-second timer. Wait for the flash to charge and then press the
shutter-release button on the ML-L3 to restart the timer.
In flash-sync modes that support red-eye reduction, the red-eye reduction lamp will light for
about one second before the shutter is released. In delayed remote mode, the self-timer lamp
will light for two seconds, followed by the red-eye reduction lamp, which lights for one second
before the shutter is released to reduce red-eye.
A
See Also
For information on choosing the length of time the camera will remain in stand-by mode
before remote control mode is cancelled, see Custom Setting c5 (Remote on duration, pg.
180). For information on controlling the beeps that sound when the remote control is used,
see Custom Setting d1 (Beep, pg. 180).
69
Using the Built-in Flash
The camera supports a variety of flash modes for photographing poorly lit or backlit
subjects.
❚❚ Using the Built-in Flash: i, k, n, and o Modes
1
Choose a shooting mode.
Rotate the mode dial to select the desired mode.
h
2
Choose a flash mode.
Press the M button and rotate until the desired flash mode is displayed in the
control panel (pg. 71).
3
Take pictures.
The flash will pop up as required when the
shutter-release button is pressed halfway, and
fire when a photograph is taken.
❚❚ Using the Built-in Flash: P, S, A, and M Modes
1
Choose a shooting mode.
Rotate the mode dial to select the desired mode.
2
Raise the flash.
Press the M button to raise the flash.
M button
3
Choose a flash mode.
Press the M button and rotate until the desired flash mode is displayed in the
control panel (pg. 71).
4
5
Select a metering method and set exposure.
Take pictures.
The flash will fire whenever a picture is taken.
70
Flash Mode
Press the M button and rotate the main command dial until the desired flash mode is
displayed in the control panel.
M button
Main command dial
Control panel
h
The current flash mode is displayed in the control panel as shown below.
Y (red-eye reduction): Use for portraits. Red-eye reduction lamp lights
before flash fires, reducing “red-eye.”
j (off): Flash does not fire even when lighting is poor or subject is back-lit.
AUTO (auto flash): When lighting is poor or subject is back lit, flash pops up
automatically when shutter-release button is pressed halfway and fires as
required.
SLOW (slow sync): Shutter speed slows automatically to capture background
lighting at night or under low light. Use to include background lighting in
portraits.
REAR (rear-curtain sync): Flash fires just before shutter closes (see below). If
this icon is not displayed, flash will fire immediately after shutter opens.
A
Rear-Curtain Sync
Normally the flash fires as the shutter opens (“front-curtain sync”; see below at left). In rearcurtain sync, the flash fires just before the shutter closes, creating the effect of a stream of light
behind moving subjects.
Front-curtain sync
Rear-curtain sync
71
The flash modes available depend on the mode currently selected with the mode
dial.
i, k, n
o
Auto
Auto+Slow sync
Auto+
Auto+
red-eye
h
Off
red-eye
reduction
Red-eye
reduction
reduction
P, A
S, M
Fill flash
Fill flash
Rearcurtain+
slow sync *
red-eye
Red-eye
reduction
Slow sync+
Slow sync
reduction
* SLOW is displayed after main M button is released.
72
Slow sync+
Off
Rearcurtain
sync
❚❚ Lowering the Built-in Flash
To save power when the flash is not in use, press it gently
downward until the latch clicks into place.
h
A
The Built-in Flash
Use with CPU lenses with focal lengths of 18–300 mm or non-CPU lenses with focal lengths of
18–200 mm (pg. 232; note that auto flash level control is available with CPU lenses only).
Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows. Lenses that block the subject’s view of the red-eye
reduction lamp may interfere with red-eye reduction. The flash has a minimum range of 60 cm
(2 ft.) and can not be used in the macro range of macro zoom lenses.
If the flash fires in ! or 9 mode (pg. 65), only one picture will be taken each time the
shutter-release button is pressed.
The shutter release may be briefly disabled to protect the flash after it has been used for several
consecutive shots. The flash can be used again after a short pause.
A
See Also
See page 198 for information on locking flash value (FV) for a metered subject before
recomposing a photograph.
For information on choosing the slowest shutter speed available when using the flash, see
Custom Setting e1 (Flash shutter speed, pg. 185). For information on using the built-in flash
in commander mode, see Custom Setting e2 (Flash cntrl for built-in flash, pg. 185). For
information on previewing the effects of the flash, see Custom Setting e3 (Modeling flash, pg.
191).
See the Appendix for more about the built-in flash, including flash control (pg. 265), shutter
sync speeds (pg. 265), and range (pg. 266). For information on optional flash units, see pg. 233.
73
ISO Sensitivity
“ISO sensitivity” is the digital equivalent of film speed. The higher the ISO sensitivity,
the less light needed to make an exposure, allowing higher shutter speeds or smaller
apertures.
h
ISO sensitivity can be set between values roughly equivalent to ISO 200 and ISO 3200
in steps equivalent to 1/3 EV. For special situations, ISO sensitivity can be lowered
below ISO 200 by about 0.3 EV (S, equivalent to ISO 160), 0.7 EV (T, equivalent
to ISO 125), or 1.0 EV (U, equivalent to ISO 100), or raised above ISO 3200 by about
0.3 EV (P, equivalent to ISO 4000), 0.7 EV (Q, equivalent to ISO 5000), or 1.0 EV
(R, equivalent to ISO 6400). Auto and scene modes also offer an AUTO option (the
default setting), which allows the camera to set ISO sensitivity automatically in
response to lighting conditions. 01 is displayed in the control panel and
viewfinder when AUTO is selected.
ISO sensitivity can be selected by pressing the W (ISO) button and rotating the main
command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel. ISO
sensitivity can also be adjusted from the shooting menu (pg. 165).
W (ISO) button
Main command dial
Control panel
A
AUTO
If the mode dial is rotated to P, S, A, or M after 01 is selected for ISO sensitivity in
another mode, the ISO sensitivity last selected in P, S, A, or M mode will be restored.
A
HI 0.3–HI 1
Pictures taken at these settings are more likely to be subject to noise and color distortion.
A
See Also
For information on enabling auto ISO sensitivity control in P, S, A, or M modes, see page 78. For
information on using the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu to reduce noise at high ISO
sensitivities, see page 165.
74
Two-Button Reset
The camera settings listed below can be restored to default
values by holding the E and B buttons down together for
more than two seconds (these buttons are marked by a green
dot). The control panel turns off briefly while settings are
reset. Custom Settings are not affected.
E button
B button
F
Option
Image quality (pg. 62)
Image size (pg. 63)
Release mode (pg. 64)
ISO sensitivity (pg. 74)
Auto and scene modes
P, S, A, M
White balance (pg. 95)
Fine tuning (pg. 97)
Color temperature (pg. 99)
Picture Control modifications
(pg. 110)
Autofocus mode (pg. 54)
Autofocus mode (live view)
k, o
i, j, l, m, P, S, A, M
n
Default
JPEG normal
L
Single frame
AUTO
200
Auto
0
5000 K
None
AF-A
Face-priority
Wide area
Normal area
Option
Focus point (pg. 56) 1
Metering (pg. 87)
AE/AF lock hold (pp. 88, 200)
Flexible program (pg. 80)
Exposure compensation
(pg. 90)
Flash compensation (pg. 91)
Bracketing (pg. 92)
FV lock (pg. 198)
Flash mode (pg. 71)
i, k, n
o
P, S, A, M
Multiple exposure (pg. 121)
Default
Center
Matrix
Off
Off
h
Off
Off
Off 2
Off
Auto frontcurtain sync
Auto slow
sync
Front curtain
sync
Off
1 Focus point not displayed if Auto-area is selected for Custom Setting a1 (AF-area mode).
2 Number of shots reset to zero. Bracketing increment reset to 1 EV (exposure/flash
bracketing) or 1 (white balance bracketing).
A
Default Settings
See pages 258–261 for a list of default settings.
75
h
76
tP, S, A, and M Modes
P, S, A, and M modes offer control over a variety of advanced settings, including shutter
speed and aperture, metering, flash compensation, and white balance.
Shutter Speed and Aperture .......................................................................................
78
Mode P (Programmed Auto)...................................................................................................
80
Mode S (Shutter-Priority Auto)...............................................................................................
81
Mode A (Aperture-Priority Auto)...........................................................................................
82
Mode M (Manual)........................................................................................................................
Long Time-Exposures (M Mode Only) ..............................................................................
83
85
Exposure .........................................................................................................................
87
Metering.........................................................................................................................................
87
Autoexposure Lock (P, S, and A Modes Only)....................................................................
88
Exposure Compensation ..........................................................................................................
90
Flash Compensation ..................................................................................................................
91
Exposure and Flash Bracketing ..............................................................................................
92
White Balance ................................................................................................................
95
Fine-Tuning White Balance......................................................................................................
97
Choosing a Color Temperature ..............................................................................................
99
t
Preset Manual............................................................................................................................... 100
Picture Controls ............................................................................................................. 108
Selecting Nikon Picture Controls .......................................................................................... 109
Modifying Existing Picture Controls..................................................................................... 110
Creating Custom Picture Controls ........................................................................................ 113
Sharing Custom Picture Controls .......................................................................................... 115
Managing Custom Picture Controls ..................................................................................... 117
Active D-Lighting .......................................................................................................... 119
Multiple Exposure ......................................................................................................... 121
The GP-1 GPS Unit ......................................................................................................... 124
77
Shutter Speed and Aperture
P, S, A, and M modes offer different degrees of control over shutter
speed and aperture:
Mode
P
S
t
A
M
Description
Camera sets shutter speed and aperture for optimal exposure.
Programmed auto
Recommended for snapshots and in other situations in which
(pg. 80)
there is little time to adjust camera settings.
Shutter-priority auto User chooses shutter speed; camera selects aperture for best
(pg. 81)
results. Use to freeze or blur motion.
User chooses aperture; camera selects shutter speed for best
Aperture-priority auto
results. Use to blur background or bring both foreground and
(pg. 82)
background into focus.
User controls both shutter speed and aperture. Set shutter speed
Manual (pg. 83)
to “A” or “&” for long time-exposures.
D
Lens Aperture Rings
When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring (pg. 228), lock the aperture ring at the minimum
aperture (highest f-number). Type G lenses are not equipped with an aperture ring.
Non-CPU lenses can only be used in exposure mode M, when aperture can be adjusted manually
using the lens aperture ring (in other modes, the shutter-release will be disabled). The camera
exposure meter, auto ISO sensitivity control, and variety of other features can not be used (pg.
165).
A
See also
Use the ISO sensitivity auto control option in the shooting menu (pg. 165) to enable auto
ISO sensitivity control in P, S, A, and M modes. Custom Setting b1 (EV steps for exposure cntrl.;
pg. 177) determines the size of the increments used for setting shutter speed and aperture.
Custom Setting f5 (Customize command dials; pg. 201) determines the roles played by the
main and sub-command dials in setting shutter speed and aperture.
78
A
Shutter Speed and Aperture
The same exposure can be achieved with different combinations of shutter speed and
aperture. Fast shutter speeds and larger apertures freeze moving objects and soften
background details, while slow shutter speeds and small apertures blur moving objects and
bring out background details.
Shutter speed
Aperture
Control panel
t
Fast shutter speed (1/1,600 s)
Slow shutter speed (1 s)
Small aperture (f/36)
Large aperture (f/3)
(Remember, the larger the f-number, the smaller the aperture.)
79
Mode P (Programmed Auto)
In this mode, the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture for
optimal exposure in most situations. This mode is recommended for snapshots and
other situations in which you want to leave the camera in charge of shutter speed
and aperture. To take photographs in programmed auto:
1
Rotate the mode dial to P.
2
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
Mode dial
t
A
Flexible Program
In mode P, different combinations of shutter speed and aperture can
be selected by rotating the main command dial (“flexible program”).
Rotate the main command dial to the right for large apertures (small fnumbers) that blur background details or fast shutter speeds that
“freeze” motion. Rotate the main command dial to the left for small
apertures (large f-numbers) that increase depth of field or slow shutter
speeds that blur motion. All combinations produce the same
exposure. While flexible program is in effect, a U indicator appears in
the control panel. To restore default shutter speed and aperture
settings, rotate the main command dial until the indicator is no longer
displayed, choose another mode, or turn the camera off.
A
See Also
See page 263 for information on the built-in exposure program.
80
Main command
dial
Mode S (Shutter-Priority Auto)
In shutter-priority auto, you choose the shutter speed while the camera
automatically selects the aperture that will produce the optimal exposure. Use slow
shutter speeds to suggest motion by blurring moving subjects, high shutter speeds
to “freeze” motion. To take photographs in shutter-priority auto:
1
Rotate the mode dial to S.
Mode dial
t
2
Choose a shutter speed.
Press the shutter-release button
halfway to activate the exposure
meters and rotate the main command
dial to choose the desired shutter
speed from values between 30 s and
1/4,000 s.
3
Main command
dial
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
A
See Also
See page 255 for information on what to do if flashing “A” or “&” indicators appear in
the shutter-speed displays.
81
Mode A (Aperture-Priority Auto)
In aperture-priority auto, you choose the aperture to control depth of field (see
below) while the camera automatically selects the shutter speed that will produce
the optimal exposure. To take photographs in aperture-priority auto:
t
1
Rotate the mode dial to A.
2
Choose an aperture.
Press the shutter-release button
halfway to activate the exposure
meters and rotate the sub-command
dial to choose the desired aperture
from values between the minimum
and maximum for the lens.
3
Mode dial
Sub command
dial
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
A
Depth of Field
“Depth of field” is the distance to which objects behind and in front of the focus point appear
to be in focus. Large apertures (low f-numbers) reduce depth of field, blurring objects behind
and in front of the main subject. Small apertures (high f-numbers) increase depth of field,
bringing out details in the background and foreground (note that depth of field is also
influenced by other factors, such as focal length and focus distance). Short field depths are
generally used in portraits to blur background details, long field depths in landscape
photographs to bring the foreground and background into focus.
To preview depth of field, press and hold the depth-of-field preview
button. The lens will be stopped down to the current aperture value,
allowing depth of field to be previewed in the viewfinder.
Depth-of-field preview
button
82
Mode M (Manual)
In manual exposure mode, you control both shutter speed and aperture. To take
photographs in manual exposure mode:
1
Rotate the mode dial to M.
2
Choose aperture and shutter speed.
Mode dial
t
Checking exposure in the electronic analog exposure display (pg. 84), rotate the
main command dial to choose a shutter speed and the sub-command dial to
choose an aperture. Shutter speed can be set to values between 30 s and
1/4,000 s, or the shutter can be held open indefinitely for a long time-exposure
(A or &, pg. 85). Aperture can be set to values between the minimum
and maximum for the lens.
Sub command dial
Aperture
Shutter
speed
Main command dial
3
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
83
A
The Electronic Analog Exposure Display
If a CPU lens is attached and a shutter speed other than A or & is selected, the
electronic analog exposure display in the viewfinder shows whether the photograph would be
under- or over-exposed at current settings. Depending on the option chosen for Custom
Setting b1 (EV steps for exposure cntrl.; pg. 177), the amount of under- or over-exposure is
shown in increments of 1/3 EV, 1/2 EV, or 1 EV. If the limits of the exposure metering system are
exceeded, the display will flash.
Optimal exposure
t
84
A
Custom Setting b1 set to 1/3 step
Underexposed by 1/3 EV
Overexposed by over 2 EV
See Also
If
(V) (the default setting) is selected for Custom Setting f7 (Reverse
indicators, pg. 201), the exposure indicators in the viewfinder and shooting information
display are displayed with positive values on the left and negative values on the right. Select
(W) to display negative values on the left and positive values on the right.
❚❚ Long Time-Exposures (M Mode Only)
Shutter speeds of “A” and “&” can be used for long time-exposure
photographs of moving lights, the stars, night scenery, or fireworks. To prevent
blurring caused by camera shake, use a tripod and an optional remote control
(pg. 241) or remote cord (pg. 241).
Shutter speed
A
&
1
Description
Shutter remains open while shutter-release button is held down. Tripod and
optional remote cord are recommended to prevent blur.
Optional ML-L3 remote control required (pg. 241). Select mode M, set shutter
speed to “A,” and select delayed remote or quick-response remote mode
(pg. 68). Shutter opens when shutter-release button on remote control is
pressed and remains open for thirty minutes or until shutter-release button is
pressed a second time.
t
Ready the camera.
Mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable, level surface. To prevent
loss of power before the exposure is complete, use a fully charged battery or an
optional AC adapter. Note that noise may be present in long exposures; before
shooting, choose On for the Long exp. NR option in the shooting menu
(pg. 165). If you are using an optional remote cord, attach it to the camera.
2
Rotate the mode dial to M.
3
Choose a shutter speed.
Mode dial
Press the shutter-release button halfway to activate the
exposure meters and rotate the main command dial
until “A” appears in the shutter-speed displays. For
a shutter speed of “&“, select delayed remote or
quick-response remote mode after choosing the shutter speed (pg. 64).
85
4
Open the shutter.
A: After focusing, press the shutter-release button on the camera or
remote cord all the way down. Keep the shutter-release button pressed until
the exposure is complete.
&: Press the shutter-release button on the remote control all the way down.
The shutter will open immediately (quick-response remote) or two seconds
after the shutter-release button is pressed (delayed remote) and remain open
until the button is pressed a second time.
5
t
Close the shutter.
A: Take your finger off the shutter-release button.
&: Press the shutter-release button on the remote control all the way down.
Shooting ends automatically after thirty minutes.
Length of exposure: 35 s
Aperture: f/25
86
Exposure
Metering
The metering method determines how the camera sets exposure. The following
options are available:
Method
Description
Recommended in most situations; selected automatically in auto and scene
3D color modes. Camera meters a wide area of the frame and sets exposure according
a
matrix II to distribution of brightness, color, distance, and composition for natural
results.
Camera meters entire frame but assigns greatest weight to center area
(defaults to 8-mm circle in center of frame; can be selected using Custom
CenterZ
Setting b3, Center-weighted area, pg. 178). Classic meter for portraits;
weighted
recommended when using filters with an exposure factor (filter factor) over 1×
(pg. 240).
Camera meters circle 3.5mm (0.14in.) in diameter (approximately 2.5% of
frame). Circle is centered on current focus point, making it possible to meter
off-center subjects (if non-CPU lens is used, or if Auto-area is selected for AFb Spot
area mode as described on page 173, camera will meter center focus point).
Ensures that subject will be correctly exposed, even when background is much
brighter or darker.
To choose a metering method, press the
Z button and rotate the main command
dial until the desired mode is displayed.
t
Z button
Main command dial
A
3D Color Matrix II Metering
In matrix metering, exposure is set using a 420-segment RGB sensor. Use a type G or D lens for
results that include range information (3D color matrix metering II; pg. 228). With other CPU
lenses, 3D range information is not included (color matrix metering II).
87
Autoexposure Lock (P, S, and A Modes Only)
Use auto exposure lock to recompose photographs after metering exposure:
1
Select center-weighted or spot
metering.
Z button
Select mode P, S, or A and choose
center-weighted or spot metering
(exposure lock has no effect in mode
M, while auto and scene modes are
not recommended as centerMain command dial
weighted and spot metering are not
available).
t
2
Lock exposure.
Position the subject in the selected focus point and press
the shutter-release button halfway. With the shutterrelease button pressed halfway and the subject
positioned in the focus point, press the AE-L/AF-L button to
lock focus and exposure.
Shutter-release
button
AE-L/AF-L button
While exposure lock is in effect, an AE-L indicator will
appear in the viewfinder.
3
Recompose the photograph.
Keeping the AE-L/AF-L button pressed, recompose the photograph and shoot.
88
A
Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture
While exposure lock is in effect, the following settings can be adjusted without altering the
metered value for exposure:
Mode
Programmed auto
Shutter-priority auto
Aperture-priority auto
Setting
Shutter speed and aperture (flexible program; pg. 80)
Shutter speed
Aperture
The new values can be confirmed in the viewfinder and control panel. Note that the metering
method can not be changed while exposure lock is in effect (changes to metering take effect
when the lock is released).
A
See Also
If On is selected for Custom Setting c1 (Shutter-release button AE-L, pg. 179), exposure will
lock when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. For information on changing the role
of the AE-L/AF-L button, see Custom Setting f4 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button, pg. 200).
t
89
Exposure Compensation
Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value suggested by the
camera, making pictures brighter or darker. It is most effective when used with
center-weighted or spot metering (pg. 87).
Exposure compensation is available in modes P, S, and A (in mode M, only the
exposure information shown in the electronic analog exposure display is affected;
shutter speed and aperture do not change).
t
Press the E button and rotate the main
command dial until the desired value is
displayed in the control panel. Exposure
compensation can be set to values
between –5 EV (underexposure) and
+5 EV (overexposure) in increments of
1/3 EV. In general, choose positive values
to make the subject brighter, negative
values to make it darker.
±0 EV
(E button pressed)
E button
Main command dial
–0.3 EV
+2 EV
At values other than ±0, a E icon will be displayed in the control panel and
viewfinder after you release the E button. The current value for exposure
compensation will be displayed when the E button is pressed.
–1 EV
No exposure
compensation
+1 EV
Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure compensation to ±0. Exposure
compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off.
A
See Also
For information on choosing the size of the increments available for exposure compensation,
see Custom Setting b1 (EV steps for exposure cntrl., pg. 177). For information on making
adjustments to exposure compensation without pressing the E button, see Custom Setting b2
(Easy exposure compensation, pg. 177).
90
Flash Compensation
Flash compensation is used to alter flash output from the level suggested by the
camera, changing the brightness of the main subject relative to the background.
Flash output can be increased to make the main subject appear brighter, or reduced
to prevent unwanted highlights or reflections.
Press the M (Y) button and rotate the sub-command dial until the desired value is
displayed in the control panel. Flash compensation can be set to values between
–3 EV (darker) and +1 EV (brighter) in increments of 1/3 EV. In general, choose
positive values to make the subject brighter, negative values to make it darker.
t
M button
Sub-command
dial
Control panel
At values other than ±0, a Y icon will be displayed in the control panel and
viewfinder after you release the M (Y) button. The current value for flash
compensation will be displayed when the M button is pressed.
±0 EV
(Y button pressed)
–0.3 EV
+1.0 EV
Normal flash output can be restored by setting flash compensation to ±0.0. Flash
exposure compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off.
A
Optional Flash Units
Flash exposure compensation is also available with an optional SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, SB-400,
or SB-R200 flash units.
A
See Also
For information on choosing the size of the increments available when setting flash
compensation, see Custom Setting b1 (EV steps for exposure cntrl., pg. 177).
91
Exposure and Flash Bracketing
Bracketing automatically varies selected settings slightly with each shot,
“bracketing” the current value. The setting affected is chosen with Custom Setting e4
(Auto bracketing set; pg. 191); below, it is assumed that AE & flash is selected to
vary exposure and flash level. Other options can be used to vary exposure or flash
level separately or to bracket white balance or Active D-Lighting.
1
Choose the number of shots.
Press the D button and rotate the main command dial to choose the number
of shots in the bracketing sequence (two or three).
No. of shots
t
Progress
indicator
D button
Main command dial
Control panel
Viewfinder
2
Select an exposure increment.
Press the D button and rotate the sub-command dial to choose the exposure
increment from values between 0.3 EV and 2.0 EV.
Exposure
increment
D button
A
Sub-command dial
Control panel
Understanding the Bracketing Display
Number of shots
Progress indicator
Description
3 shots: unmodified, negative, positive
2 shots: unmodified, positive
2 shots: unmodified, negative
92
3
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
The camera will vary exposure and flash level with each shot.
At default settings, the first shot will be taken at the current
values for exposure and flash compensation and the
following shots at modified values. If the bracketing
sequence consists of three shots, the bracketing increment
will be subtracted from the current values in the second shot
and added in the third shot, “bracketing” the current values.
The modified values can be higher or lower than the
maximum and minimum values for exposure and flash
compensation. The modified shutter speed and aperture are
displayed in the control panel and viewfinder.
t
While bracketing is in effect, a bracketing progress indicator will be displayed in
the control panel. The y segment will disappear from the indicator when the
unmodified shot is taken, the z indicator when the shot with the negative
increment is taken, and the x indicator when the shot with the positive
increment is taken.
Exposure increment:0 EV
y
Exposure increment:–1 EV
z
Exposure increment:+1 EV
x
To cancel bracketing, press the D button and rotate the main command dial until the
number of shots in the bracketing sequence is zero and M is no longer displayed in
the control panel. The program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing
is activated.
A
See Also
See page 264 for a list of bracketing programs. For information on choosing the size of the
exposure increment, see Custom Setting b1 (EV steps for exposure cntrl., pg. 177). For
information on choosing the order in which bracketing is performed, see Custom Setting e6
(Bracketing order, pg. 195).
93
A
Exposure Bracketing
The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture (programmed auto),
aperture (shutter-priority auto), or shutter speed (aperture-priority auto, manual exposure
mode). When On is selected for ISO sensitivity auto control (pg. 166), the camera will
automatically vary ISO sensitivity for optimum exposure when the limits of the camera
exposure system are exceeded. In exposure bracketing, shutter speed will only be changed
after the camera has adjusted ISO sensitivity.
A
Exposure and Flash Bracketing
In ! and 9 modes, shooting will pause after the number of shots specified in the
bracketing program. Selecting auto or scene modes will cancel bracketing; bracketing will
resume when mode P, S, A, or M is selected. Exposure and flash bracketing are cancelled when
WB bracketing or ADL bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e4 (Auto bracketing set;
pg. 191).
t A Resuming Exposure or Flash Bracketing
If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been taken, shooting can be
resumed from the next shot in the sequence after the memory card has been replaced or shots
have been deleted to make room on the memory card. If the camera is turned off before all
shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from the next shot in the
sequence when the camera is turned on.
94
White Balance
White balance ensures that colors are unaffected by the color of the light source.
Auto white balance is recommended for most light sources; if necessary, other values
can be selected according to the type of source. The following options are available
in P, S, A, and M modes (auto white balance is used in auto and scene modes):
Option
Color temp. (K)
Sodium-vapor lamps
2,700*
Warm-white fluorescent
White fluorescent
Cool-white fluorescent
(default for Fluorescent)
Day white fluorescent
Daylight fluorescent
3,000*
3,700*
Description
Camera sets white balance automatically;
recommended in most situations. For best results,
use type G or D lens. If built-in or optional flash is
used, white balance reflects conditions in effect
when flash fires.
Use under incandescent lighting.
Use with the following seven light sources:
Use under sodium-vapor lighting (found in sports
venues).
Use under warm-white fluorescent lights.
Use under white fluorescent lights.
4,200*
Use under cool-white fluorescent lights.
5,000*
High temp. mercury-vapor
7,200*
Direct sunlight
Flash
Cloudy
Shade
5,200*
5,400*
6,000*
8,000*
2,500–
10,000
Use under daylight white fluorescent lights.
Use under daylight fluorescent lights.
Use under high color temperature light sources (e.g.
mercury-vapor lamps).
Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight.
Use with built-in or optional flash.
Use in daylight under overcast skies.
Use in daylight with subjects in the shade.
Auto
(default)
3,500–
8,000*
J Incandescent
I Fluorescent
3,000*
F
H
N
G
M
K Choose color temp.
6,500*
t
Choose color temperature from list of values (pg. 99).
Use subject, light source, or existing photograph as
reference for white balance (pg. 100).
* All values are approximate. Fine-tuning set to 0.
LPreset manual
—
95
To select a value for white balance, press the WB button and rotate the main
command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel. White
balance can also be adjusted from the shooting menu (pg. 165).
WB button
Main command dial
Control panel
t
A
I (Fluorescent)
The bulb type is chosen using the White balance option in the shooting menu (pg.165).
A
See Also
When WB bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e4 (Auto bracketing set, pg. 191), the
camera will create several images each time the shutter is released. White balance will be
varied with each image, “bracketing” the value currently selected for white balance. See page
191 for more information.
96
Fine-Tuning White Balance
White balance can be “fine tuned” to compensate for variations in the color of the
light source or to introduce a deliberate color cast into an image. White balance is
fine tuned using the White balance option in the shooting menu or by pressing the
WB button and rotating the sub-command dial.
❚❚ The White Balance Menu
1
Select a white balance option.
Select White balance in the shooting menu (pg.
165), then highlight a white balance option and
press 2. If an option other than Fluorescent,
Choose color temp., or Preset manual is
selected, proceed to Step 2. If Fluorescent is
selected, highlight a lighting type and press 2. If Choose color temp. is
selected, highlight a color temperature and press 2. If Preset manual is
selected, choose a preset as described on page 106 before proceeding.
2
t
Fine tune white balance.
Use the multi selector to fine-tune white
balance. White balance can be fine tuned on
the amber (A)–blue (B) axis and the green (G)–
magenta (M) axis. The horizontal (amber-blue)
Coordinates
axis corresponds to color temperature, with
each increment equivalent to about 5 mired.
Adjustment
The vertical (green-magenta) axis has the
similar effects to the corresponding color compensation (CC) filters.
Green (G)
Increase green
Blue (B)
Increase magenta
Increase blue
Amber (A)
Magenta (M)
Increase amber
A
White Balance Fine Tuning
The colors on the fine-tuning axes are relative, not absolute. For example, moving the cursor
to B (blue) when a “warm” setting such as J (incandescent) is selected for white balance will
make photographs slightly “colder” but will not actually make them blue.
97
3
Press J.
Press J to save settings and return to the shooting menu. If
white balance has been fine-tuned on the A-B axis, a E icon
will be displayed in the control panel.
❚❚ The WB Button
t
At settings other than K (Choose color temp.) and L (Preset manual), the WB
button can be used to fine-tune white balance on the amber (A)–blue (B) axis (pg. 97;
to fine-tune white balance when K or L is selected, use the shooting menu as
described on page 97). Six settings in both directions are available; each increment
is equivalent to about 5 mired (see below). Press the WB button and rotate the subcommand dial until the desired value is displayed in the control panel. Rotating the
sub-command dial to the left increases the amount of amber (A). Rotating the subcommand dial to the right increases the amount of blue (B). At settings other than 0,
a E icon appears in the control panel.
WB button
A
Sub-command dial
Control panel
“Mired”
Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference in color at low color
temperatures than it would at higher color temperatures. For example, a change of 1000 K
produces a much greater change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K. Mired, calculated by
multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 10 6, is a measure of color temperature that
takes such variation into account, and as such is the unit used in color-temperature
compensation filters. E.g.:
• 4000 K–3000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=83 mired
• 7000 K–6000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=24 mired
98
Choosing a Color Temperature
At a setting of K (Choose color temp.), color temperature can be selected by
pressing the WB button and rotating the sub-command dial until the desired value is
displayed in the control panel. Color temperature can also be selected in the
shooting menu (pg. 165).
WB button
Sub-command dial
Control panel
t
A
Color Temperature
The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other conditions. Color
temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source, defined with reference to
the temperature to which an object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same
wavelengths. While light sources with a color temperature in the neighborhood of 5,000–
5,500 K appear white, light sources with a lower color temperature, such as incandescent light
bulbs, appear slightly yellow or red. Light sources with a higher color temperature appear
tinged with blue.
A
Choose Color Temperature
Note that the desired results will not be obtained with flash or fluorescent lighting. Choose N
(Flash) or I (Fluorescent) for these sources. With other light sources, take a test shot to
determine if the selected value is appropriate.
A
The White Balance Menu
Color temperature can also be selected in the white balance menu. Note that the color
temperature with the WB button and the sub-command dial replaces the value selected in the
white balance menu.
99
Preset Manual
Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance settings for shooting
under mixed lighting or to compensate for light sources with a strong color cast. Two
methods are available for setting preset white balance:
Method
Description
Direct
Neutral gray or white object is placed under lighting that will be used in
measurement final photograph and white balance is measured by camera (pg. 101).
Copy from existing
White balance is copied from photo on memory card (pg. 105).
photograph
The camera can store up to five values for preset white balance in presets d-0 through
d-4. A descriptive comment can be added to any white balance preset (pg. 107).
t
d-0: Stores last value measured
for white balance (pg. 101). This
preset is overwritten when a
new value is measured.
d-1–d-4: Store values copied from d-0 (pg. 104).
Store values copied from
images on memory card
(pg. 105).
100
❚❚ Measuring a Value for Preset White Balance
1
Light a reference object.
Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that will be used in the
final photograph. In studio settings, a standard gray panel can be used as a
reference object. Note that exposure is automatically increased by 1 EV when
measuring white balance; in exposure mode M, adjust exposure so that the
electronic analog exposure displays shows ±0 (pg. 84).
2
Set white balance to L (Preset manual).
Press the WB button and rotate the main command dial until L is displayed in
the control panel.
WB button
3
Main command dial
t
Control panel
Select direct measurement mode.
Release the WB button briefly and then press the button
until the L icon in the control panel starts to flash. A
flashing D will also appear in the control panel and
viewfinder. At default settings, the displays will flash for
about six seconds. To exit without measuring a value for
preset white balance, press the WB button again.
Control panel
Viewfinder
101
4
Measure white balance.
Before the indicators stop flashing, frame the reference object so that
it fills the viewfinder and press the shutter-release button all the way
down. The camera will measure a value for white balance and store it in preset
d-0. No photograph will be recorded; white balance can be measured
accurately even when the camera is not in focus.
5
Check the results.
If the camera was able to measure a value for white
balance, C will flash in the control panel, while the
viewfinder will show a flashing a. At default settings,
the displays will flash for about six seconds.
t
Control panel
Viewfinder
If lighting is too dark or too bright, the camera may be
unable to measure white balance. A flashing b a will
appear in the control panel and viewfinder (at default
settings, the displays will flash for about six seconds).
Press the shutter-release button halfway to return to
Step 4 and measure white balance again.
Control panel
Viewfinder
6
Select preset d-0.
If the new value for preset white balance will be used immediately, select preset
d-0 by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub-command dial until d-0 is
displayed in the control panel.
D
Direct Measurement Mode
If no operations are performed while the displays are flashing, direct measurement mode will
end in the time selected for Custom Setting c2 (Auto meter-off delay, pg. 179). The default
setting is six seconds.
102
A
Preset d-0
The new value for white balance will be stored in preset d-0,
automatically replacing the previous value for this preset (no
confirmation dialog will be displayed). A thumbnail will be displayed
in the preset white balance list.
To use the new value for white balance, select preset d-0 (if no value has been measured for
white balance before d-0 is selected, white balance will be set to a color temperature of
5,200 K, the same as Direct sunlight). The new white balance value will remain in preset d-0
until white balance is measured again. By copying preset d-0 to one of the other presets before
measuring a new value for white balance, up to five white balance values can be stored (pg.
104).
t
103
❚❚ Copying White Balance from d-0 to Presets d-1–d-4
Follow the steps below to copy a measured value for white balance from d-0 to any
of the other presets (d-1–d-4).
1
Select L (Preset manual).
Highlight Preset manual in the white balance
menu (pg. 95) and press 2.
2
t
Select a destination.
Highlight the destination preset (d-1 to d-4)
and press the W button.
W button
3
Copy d-0 to the selected preset.
Highlight Copy d-0 and press J. If a comment
has been created for d-0 (pg. 107), the comment
will be copied to the comment for the selected
preset.
A
Choosing a White Balance Preset
To select another white balance preset in the Preset manual menu (see
Step 3, above), press 1 to highlight the current white balance preset
(d-0– d-4) and press 2.
104
❚❚ Copying White Balance from a Photograph (d-1–d-4 Only)
Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from a photograph on the
memory card to a selected preset (d-1–d-4 only). Existing white balance values can
not be copied to preset d-0.
1
Select L (Preset manual).
Highlight Preset manual in the white balance
menu (pg. 95) and press 2.
2
Select a destination.
t
Highlight the destination preset (d-1 to d-4)
and press the W button.
W button
3
Choose Select image.
Highlight Select image and press 2.
4
Highlight a source image.
Highlight the source image. To view the
highlighted image full frame, press the X
button.
5
Copy white balance.
Press J to copy the white balance value for the
highlighted photograph to the selected preset.
If the highlighted photograph has a comment (pg. 205), the comment will be
copied to the comment for the selected preset.
105
❚❚ Selecting a White Balance Preset
To set white balance to a preset value:
1
Select L (Preset manual).
Highlight Preset manual in the white balance
menu (pg. 95) and press 2.
2
Select a preset.
Highlight the desired preset and press the
W button. To select the highlighted preset
and display the fine tuning menu (pg. 97)
without completing the next step, press J
W button
instead of pressing the W button.
t
3
Select Set.
Highlight Set and press 2. Fine tuning menu
for the selected white balance preset is
displayed (pg. 98).
A
Selecting a White Balance Preset: the WB Button
At a setting of L (Preset manual), presets can also be selected by pressing the WB button
and rotating the sub-command dial. The current preset is displayed in the control panel while
the WB button is pressed.
WB button
106
Sub-command dial
Control panel
❚❚ Entering a Comment
Follow the steps below to enter a descriptive comment of up to thirty-six characters
for a selected white balance preset.
1
Select L (Preset manual).
Highlight Preset manual in the white balance
menu (pg. 95) and press 2.
2
Select a preset.
t
Highlight the desired preset and press the
W button.
W button
3
Select Edit comment.
Highlight Edit comment and press 2.
4
Edit the comment.
Edit the comment as described on page 169.
107
Picture Controls
Nikon’s unique Picture Control system makes it possible to share image processing
settings among compatible devices and software. Select from the Picture Controls
provided with the camera to instantly adjust image processing settings, or make
independent adjustments to sharpening, contrast, brightness, saturation, and hue.
These settings can be saved under new names as custom Picture Controls to be
recalled or edited at will. Custom Picture Controls can also be saved to the memory
card for use in compatible software, and software-created Picture Controls can be
loaded into the camera. Any given set of Picture Controls will produce nearly the
same results on all cameras that support the Nikon Picture Control system.
t
❚❚ Using Picture Controls
Picture Controls can be used as described below.
• Select Nikon Picture Controls (pg. 109): Select an existing Nikon Picture Control.
• Modify existing Picture Controls (pg. 110): Modify an existing Picture Control to create a
combination of sharpening, contrast, brightness, saturation, and hue for a
particular scene or effect.
• Create custom Picture Controls (pg. 113): Store modified Picture Controls under unique
names and recall or edit them as desired.
• Share custom Picture Controls (pg. 115): Custom Picture Controls created with the
camera can be saved to the memory card for use in ViewNX (supplied) and other
compatible software, or software-created custom Picture Controls can be loaded
into the camera.
• Manage custom Picture Controls (pg. 117): Rename or delete custom Picture Controls.
A
Nikon Picture Controls Versus Custom Picture Controls
The Picture Controls supplied by Nikon are referred to as Nikon Picture Controls. In addition to
the Nikon Picture Controls supplied with the camera, optional Picture Controls are available for
download from Nikon websites. Custom Picture Controls are created through modifications to
existing Nikon Picture Controls. Both Nikon and custom Picture Controls can be shared among
compatible devices and software.
108
Selecting Nikon Picture Controls
The camera offers six preset Nikon Picture Controls. Choose a Picture Control
according to the subject or type of scene.
Option
Description
Standard processing for balanced results. Recommended for most
Q Standard
situations.
Minimal processing for natural results. Choose for photographs that will
R Neutral
later be extensively processed or retouched.
Pictures are enhanced for a vivid, photoprint effect. Choose for
S Vivid
photographs that emphasize primary colors.
T Monochrome Take monochrome photographs.
e Portrait
Lends a natural texture and rounded feel to the skin of portrait subjects.
f Landscape
Produces vibrant landscapes and cityscapes.
t
❚❚ Choosing a Picture Control
1
Select Set Picture Control.
In the shooting menu (pg. 165), highlight Set
Picture Control and press 2.
2
Select a Picture Control.
Highlight the desired Picture Control and press
J.
A
The Picture Control Grid
Pressing the W button in Step 2 displays a Picture Control grid
showing the contrast and saturation for the selected Picture Control in
relation to the other Picture Controls (only contrast is displayed when
Monochrome is selected). To select a different Picture Control, press
1 or 3, then press 2 to display Picture Control options and press J.
A
The Picture Control Indicator
The current Picture Control is shown in the shooting information
display when the R button is pressed. Picture Controls can also be
selected in the shooting information display (pg. 12).
Picture Control
indicator
109
Modifying Existing Picture Controls
Existing Nikon or custom Picture Controls can be modified to
suit the scene or the user’s creative intent. Choose a balanced
combination of settings using Quick adjust, or make manual
adjustments to individual settings.
1
Select a Picture Control.
Highlight the desired Picture Control in the Set
Picture Control menu (pg. 109) and press 2.
t
2
Adjust settings.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight the desired setting
and press 4 or 2 to choose a value (pg. 111).
Repeat this step until all settings have been
adjusted, or select Quick adjust to choose a
preset combination of settings. Default settings
can be restored by pressing the O button.
3
A
Press J.
Modifications to Original Picture Controls
Picture Controls that have been modified from default settings are
indicated by an asterisk (“*”) in the Set Picture Control menu.
110
❚❚ Picture Control Settings
Option
Manual adjustments
(all Picture Controls)
Description
Choose from options between –2 and +2 to reduce or exaggerate the effect
of the selected Picture Control (note that this resets all manual adjustments).
Quick adjust
For example, choosing positive values for Vivid makes pictures more vivid.
Not available with Neutral, Monochrome, or custom Picture Controls.
Control the sharpness of outlines. Select A to adjust sharpening
Sharpening automatically according to the type of scene, or choose from values between
0 (no sharpening) and 9 (the higher the value, the greater the sharpening).
Select A to adjust contrast automatically according to the type of scene, or
choose from values between –3 and +3 (choose lower values to prevent
highlights in portrait subjects from being “washed out” in direct sunlight,
Contrast
higher values to preserve detail in misty landscapes and other low-contrast
subjects). Not available when Active D-Lighting (pg. 119) is on; reset if Active
D-Lighting is activated after value is changed.
Choose –1 for reduced brightness, +1 for enhanced brightness. Does not
Brightness affect exposure. Not available when Active D-Lighting (pg. 119) is on; reset if
Active D-Lighting is activated after value is changed.
Control the vividness of colors. Select A to adjust saturation automatically
Saturation according to the type of scene, or choose from values between –3 and +3
(lower values reduce saturation and higher values increase it).
Manual adjustments Manual adjustments
(non-monochrome only) (monochrome only)
Hue
Choose negative values (to a minimum of –3) to make reds more purple,
blues more green, and greens more yellow, positive values (up to +3) to
make reds more orange, greens more blue, and blues more purple.
Filter
effects
Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs. Choose
from Off (the default setting), yellow, orange, red, and green (pg. 112).
Toning
Choose the tint used in monochrome photographs from B&W (black-andwhite, the default setting), Sepia, Cyanotype (blue-tinted monochrome),
Red, Yellow, Green, Blue Green, Blue, Purple Blue, Red Purple (pg. 112).
t
D
“A” (Auto)
Results for auto contrast and saturation vary with exposure and the
position of the subject in the frame. Use a type G or D lens for best
results. The icons for Picture Controls that use auto contrast and
saturation are displayed in green in the Picture Control grid, and lines
appear parallel to the axes of the grid.
111
A
The Picture Control Grid
Pressing the W button in Step 2 displays a Picture Control grid
showing the contrast and saturation for the selected Picture Control in
relation to the other Picture Controls (only contrast is displayed when
Monochrome is selected). Release the W button to return to the
Picture Control menu.
A
Previous Settings
The line under the value display in the Picture Control setting menu
indicates the previous value for the setting. Use this as a reference
when adjusting settings.
A
t
Filter Effects (Monochrome Only)
The options in this menu simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs. The
following filter effects are available:
Option
Description
Y Yellow Enhances contrast. Can be used to tone down the brightness of the sky in
O Orange landscape photographs. Orange produces more contrast than yellow, red more
R
Red contrast than orange.
G Green Softens skin tones. Can be used for portraits.
Note that the effects achieved with Filter effects are more pronounced than those produced
by physical glass filters.
A
Toning (Monochrome Only)
Pressing 3 when Toning is selected displays saturation options. Press
4 or 2 to adjust saturation. Saturation control is not available when
B&W (black-and-white) is selected.
112
Creating Custom Picture Controls
The Nikon Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be modified and saved as
custom Picture Controls.
1
Select Manage Picture Control.
In the shooting menu (pg. 165), highlight
Manage Picture Control and press 2.
2
Select Save/edit.
Highlight Save/edit and press 2.
3
t
Select a Picture Control.
Highlight an existing Picture Control and press
2, or press J to proceed to step 5 and save a
copy of the highlighted Picture Control without
further modification.
4
Edit the selected Picture Control.
See page 111 for more information. To abandon
any changes and start over, press the O button.
Press J when settings are complete.
5
Select a destination.
Choose a destination for the custom Picture
Control (C-1 through C-9) and press 2.
113
6
Name the Picture Control.
The text-entry dialog shown at right will be
displayed. By default, new Picture Controls
are named by adding a two-digit number
(assigned automatically) to the name of the
existing Picture Control. This name can be
edited to create a new name as described
below.
Keyboard
area
Name area
To move the cursor in the name area, press the W button and press 4 or 2. To
enter a new letter at the current cursor position, use the multi selector to
highlight the desired character in the keyboard area and press the X button. To
delete the character at the current cursor position, press the O button.
t
Custom Picture Control names can be up to 19 characters long. Any characters
after the 19th will be deleted.
After entering the name, press J. The new Picture
Control will appear in the Picture Control list.
Custom Picture Controls can be renamed at any time
using the Rename option in the Manage Picture Control
menu.
A
Custom Picture Controls
The edit display for custom Picture Controls contains the same options
as the original Nikon Picture Control on which it is based. The original
control is shown by an icon in the top right corner of the display.
A
Original Picture
Control icon
Custom Picture Controls
The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as those on which the custom
Picture Control was based.
114
Sharing Custom Picture Controls
Custom Picture Controls created using the Picture Control Utility available with
ViewNX or optional software such as Capture NX 2 can be copied to a memory card
and loaded into the camera, or custom Picture Controls created with the camera can
be copied to the memory card to be used in compatible cameras and software.
❚❚ Copying Custom Picture Controls to the Camera
1
Select Load/save.
In the Manage Picture Control menu, highlight
Load/save and press 2.
t
2
Select Copy to camera.
Highlight Copy to camera and press 2.
3
Select a Picture Control.
Highlight a custom Picture Control and either
press 2 to view current Picture Control settings,
or press J to proceed to Step 4.
4
Select a destination.
Choose a destination for the custom Picture
Control (C-1 through C-9) and press 2.
115
5
Name the Picture Control.
Name the Picture Control as described on page
114. The new Picture Control will appear in the
Picture Control list and can be renamed at any
time using the Rename option in the Manage
Picture Control menu.
t ❚❚ Saving Custom Picture Controls to the Memory Card
1
Select Copy to card.
After displaying the Load/save menu as
described in Step 1 on page 115, highlight Copy
to card and press 2.
2
Select a Picture Control.
Highlight a custom Picture Control and press 2.
3
Choose a destination.
Choose a destination from slots 1 through 99
and press J to save the selected Picture Control
to the memory card. Any Picture Controls that
may already have been saved to the selected
slot will be overwritten.
A
Saving Custom Picture Controls
Up to 99 custom Picture Controls can be stored on the memory card at any one time. The
memory card can only be used to store user-created custom Picture Controls. The Nikon
Picture Controls supplied with the camera can not be copied to the memory card.
116
Managing Custom Picture Controls
Follow the steps below to rename or delete custom Picture Controls.
❚❚ Renaming Custom Picture Controls
1
Select Rename.
In the Manage Picture Control menu, highlight
Rename and press 2.
2
Select a Picture Control.
Highlight a custom Picture Control (C-1 through
C-9) and press 2.
3
t
Rename the Picture Control.
Rename the Picture Control as described on
page 114.
❚❚ Deleting Custom Picture Controls from the Camera
1
Select Delete.
In the Manage Picture Control menu, highlight
Delete and press 2.
2
Select a Picture Control.
Highlight a custom Picture Control (C-1 through
C-9) and press 2.
3
Select Yes.
Highlight Yes and press J to delete the selected
Picture Control.
117
❚❚ Deleting Custom Picture Controls from the Memory Card
1
Select Load/save.
In the Manage Picture Control menu, highlight
Load/save and press 2.
2
Select Delete from card.
Highlight Delete from card and press 2.
t
3
Select a Picture Control.
Highlight a custom Picture Control (slot1
through 99) and either:
• press 2 to view current Picture Control
settings, or
• press J to display confirmation dialog shown
at right.
4
Select Yes.
Highlight Yes and press J to delete the selected
Picture Control.
A
Nikon Picture Controls
The Nikon Picture Controls supplied with the camera (Standard, Neutral, Vivid,
Monochrome, Portrait, and Landscape) can not be renamed or deleted.
118
Active D-Lighting
Active D-Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows, creating photographs
with natural contrast. Use for high contrast scenes, for example when
photographing brightly lit outdoor scenery through a door or window or taking
pictures of shaded subjects on a sunny day. To use Active D-Lighting:
1
Select matrix metering.
Matrix metering (Z, pg. 87) is recommended when using Active D-Lighting.
2
Select Active D-Lighting.
In the shooting menu (pg. 165), highlight Active
D-lighting and press 2.
3
t
Choose an option.
Highlight Auto, Extra high, High, Normal, Low,
or Off and press J. Choose Auto to let the
camera adjust D-Lighting automatically
according to shooting conditions.
119
D
Active D-Lighting
Noise (grains, banding, mottling) may appear in photographs taken with Active D-Lighting at
high ISO sensitivities. The Brightness and Contrast Picture Control settings (pg. 111) can not
be adjusted while active D-Lighting is in effect. In exposure mode M, an Active D-Lighting
setting of Auto is equivalent to Normal.
D
“Active D-Lighting” Versus “D-Lighting”
The Active D-Lighting option in the shooting menu adjusts exposure before shooting to
optimize the dynamic range, while the D-Lighting option in the retouch menu optimizes
dynamic range in images after shooting.
A
t
120
ADL Bracketing
When ADL bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e4 (Auto bracketing set, pg. 191), the
camera will automatically vary Active D-Lighting over two photographs: the first will be taken
with the current setting for Active-D-Lighting, the second with Active D-Lighting off. See page
193 for more information.
Multiple Exposure
Follow the steps below to record a series of two to three exposures in a single
photograph, using RAW data from the camera image sensor to produce colors
noticeably superior to photographs combined in an imaging application. Multiple
exposures can be recorded at any image quality setting.
❚❚ Creating a Multiple Exposure
Note that at default settings, shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be
recorded automatically if no operations are performed for 30 s.
1
Select Multiple exposure.
Highlight Multiple exposure in the shooting
menu and press 2.
2
t
Select Number of shots.
Highlight Number of shots and press 2.
3
Select the number of shots.
Press 1 or 3 to choose the number of
exposures (two or three) that will be combined
to form a single photograph and press J.
4
Select Auto gain.
Highlight Auto gain and press 2.
A
Extended Recording Times
For an interval between exposures of more than 30 s, select On for the Image review (pg. 163)
option in the playback menu and extend the monitor-off delay for image review using Custom
Setting c4 (Monitor off delay, pg. 180). The maximum interval between exposures is 30 s
longer than the option selected for Custom Setting c4.
121
5
Set gain.
Highlight one of the following options and
press J.
Option
Description
Gain adjusted according to number of
On
exposures actually recorded (gain for each
(default) exposure is set to 1/2 for 2 exposures, 1/3 for
3 exposures).
Gain is not adjusted when recording
Off
multiple exposure. Recommended if
background is dark.
t
6
Select Done.
Highlight Done and press J. A n icon will be
displayed in the control panel. To exit without
taking a multiple exposure, select Multiple
exposure > Reset in the shooting menu.
7
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
In ! and 9 release modes (pg. 64), the
camera records all exposures in a single burst. In
single-frame release mode, one photograph will
be taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed; continue shooting
until all exposures have been recorded (for information on interrupting a
multiple exposure before all photographs are recorded, see page 123).
122
The n icon will blink until shooting ends. When
shooting ends, multiple exposure mode will end
and the n icon will no longer be displayed.
Repeat steps 1–7 to take additional multiple
exposures.
t
❚❚ Interrupting Multiple Exposures
Selecting Multiple exposure in the shooting menu while a
multiple exposure is being recorded displays the options shown
at right. To interrupt a multiple exposure before the specified
number of exposures have been taken, highlight Cancel and
press J. If shooting ends before the specified number of
exposures has been taken, a multiple exposure will be created
from the exposures recorded to that point. If Auto gain is on, gain will be adjusted
to reflect the number of exposures actually recorded. Note that shooting will end
automatically if:
• A two-button reset is performed (pg. 75)
• The camera is turned off
• The battery is exhausted
• Pictures are deleted
D
Multiple Exposure
Do not remove or replace the memory card while recording a multiple exposure.
Live view (pg. 43) can not be used to record multiple exposures.
The information listed in the playback photo information display (including date of recording
and camera orientation) is for the first shot in the multiple exposure.
A
Other Settings
While multiple exposure mode is in effect, memory cards can not be formatted, changes can
not be made to bracketing or to shooting menu options other than White balance, and the
Lock mirror up for cleaning and Image Dust Off ref photo options in the setup menu can
not used.
123
The GP-1 GPS Unit
The GP-1 GPS unit (available separately) can be connected to the camera’s accessory
terminal as shown below using the cable supplied with the GP-1, allowing
information on the camera’s current position to be recorded when photographs are
taken. Turn the camera off before connecting the GP-1; for more information, see the
GP-1 manual.
t
When the camera establishes communication with the GP-1, a
X icon will be displayed in the control panel. Photo
information for pictures taken while the X icon is displayed will
include an additional page (pg. 133) recording the current
latitude, longitude, altitude, and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). If no data are
received from the GP-1 for two seconds, the X icon will clear from the display and
the camera will stop recording GPS information.
A
GPS Data
GPS data are only recorded when the X icon is displayed. Confirm
that the X icon is displayed in the control panel before shooting. A
flashing X icon indicates that the GP-1 is searching for a signal;
pictures taken while the X icon is flashing will not include GPS data.
124
❚❚ Setup Menu Options
The GPS item in the setup menu contains the options listed below.
• Auto meter off: Choose whether or not the exposure meters will turn off
automatically when the GP-1 is attached.
Option
Description
Exposure meters will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for
Enable the period specified in Custom Setting c2 (Auto meter-off delay, pg. 179). This
(default) reduces the drain on the battery but may prevent GPS data from being recorded
if the shutter-release button is pressed all the way down without pausing.
Exposure meters will not turn off while the GP-1 is connected; GPS data will
Disable
always be recorded.
• Position: This item is only available if the GP-1 is connected, when it displays the
current latitude, longitude, altitude, and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) as
reported by the GP-1.
t
A
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)
UTC data is provided by the GPS device and is independent of the camera clock.
125
t
126
IMore on Playback
This chapter describes how to view photographs and details the operations that can
be performed during playback.
Full-Frame Playback...................................................................................................... 128
Photo Information ...................................................................................................................... 129
Thumbnail Playback ..................................................................................................... 135
Calendar Playback......................................................................................................... 136
I
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom ....................................................................... 138
Protecting Photographs from Deletion .................................................................... 139
Deleting Individual Photographs............................................................................... 140
Pictmotion ...................................................................................................................... 141
Slide Shows..................................................................................................................... 143
127
Full-Frame Playback
To play photographs back, press the K button. The
most recent photograph will be displayed in the
monitor.
To
Use
Description
Press 2 to view photographs in order recorded, 4 to view
photographs in reverse order.
View additional
photographs
Press 1 or 3 to view information about current photograph
(pg. 129).
View photo
information
I
View
thumbnails
Zoom in on
photograph
W
X
See page 138 for more information on playback zoom.
Delete images
O
Change protect
status
L
Return to
shooting mode
See page 135 for more information on the thumbnail display.
Confirmation dialog will be displayed. Press O again to delete
photo.
To protect image, or to remove protection from protected image,
press L button (pg. 139).
/ K Monitor will turn off. Photographs can be taken immediately.
Display menus
G
Retouch photo
or play movie
J
See page 159 for more information.
Create retouched copy of current photograph (pg. 209). If
current picture is marked with 1 icon to show that it is a
movie, pressing J starts movie playback (pg. 52).
A
Rotate Tall
To display “tall” (portrait-orientation) photographs in tall orientation,
select On for the Rotate tall option in the playback menu (pg. 163).
A
Image Review
When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu (pg. 163),
photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor for about 4 s
(the default setting) after shooting.
A
See Also
See Custom Setting c4 (Monitor off delay, pg. 180) for information on choosing how long the
monitor will remain on when no operations are performed.
128
Photo Information
Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in full-frame playback.
There are up to eight pages of information for each photo. Press 1 or 3 to cycle
through photo information as shown below. Note that shooting data, RGB
histograms, and highlights are only displayed if corresponding option is selected for
Display mode (pg. 163). GPS data are only displayed if a GPS device was used when
the photo was taken.
N I KON D90
1 / 12
1/ 12
LATITUDE.
LONGITUDE
1/ 250
AUTO
100NCD90
DSC _0001. JPG
15/09/2008 10 : 02 : 27
F11
200
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
NOI SE REDUC. : H I I SO, NORM
ACT . D–L I GHT. : NORMAL
: D–L I GHT I NG
RETOUCH
WARM TONE
CYANOTYPE
TR I M
: SPRI NG HAS COME. SP
COMMENT
RI NG HAS COME. 3636
N
35 º 36. 371'
E
1 39 º 43. 696'
35m
15/09/2008
01:15:29
0, 0
100NCD90 DSC_0001. JPG
15/09/2008 10: 15: 29
N OR
ORMAL
AL
4288x2848
File information
35mm
ALTITUDE
TIME(UTC)
NOR
ORMAL
AL
4288x2848
N I KON D90
Overview data
12/12
N I KON D90
GPS data
MTR, SPD, AP.
EXP. MODE, I SO
, EXP. TUN I NG
FOCAL LENGTH
LENS
AF / VR
FLASH MODE,
: , 1/ 250, F11
: , 200
: 0, 0
: 35mm
: 18–105
/ 3. 5–5.6
: A / VR–On
: Built – i n, TTL, +1. 3
WHI T E BALANCE
COLOR SPACE
PI CTURE CNTRL
QUICK ADJUST
SHARPENING
CONTRAST
BRI GHTNESS
SATURATION
HUE
CMD : M : TTL, +3. 0 A: TTL, +3. 0
C: OFF
B: OFF
N I KON D90
High l i gh t s
N I KON D90
13 / 13
RGB histogram
12/12
Highlights
N I KON D90
12/12
Shooting data 3
N I KON D90
12/12
Shooting data 1
I
: AUTO, 0, 0
: s RGB
: STANDARD
:0
:3
:0
:0
:0
:0
12/12
Shooting data 2
❚❚ File Information
2
1
3
1/ 12
9
100NCD90
DSC _0001. JPG
15/09/2008 10 : 02 : 27
8
1 Protect status................. 139
2 Retouch indicator ........ 209
3 Frame number/
total number of images
7
ORM AL
N OR
4288x2848
4
5
6
4 File name ........................... 61
5 Image quality................... 62
6 Image size ......................... 63
7 Time of recording............27
8 Date of recording............27
9 Folder name................... 162
129
❚❚ RGB Histogram 1
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
I
8
N I KON D90
1 Protect status .................139
2 Retouch indicator .........209
3 White balance ..................95
White balance finetuning ..............................97
4 Camera name
13 / 13
5 Histogram (RGB channel).
In all histograms,
horizontal axis gives
pixel brightness, vertical
axis number of pixels.
9
6 Histogram (red channel)
7 Histogram (green
channel)
8 Histogram (blue channel)
9 Frame number/
total number of images
1 Displayed only if RGB histogram is selected for Display mode (pg. 163).
A
Playback Zoom
To zoom in on the photograph when the histogram is displayed, press X
(for more information on playback zoom, see page 138). The histogram
will be updated to show only the data for the portion of the image visible
in the monitor.
N I KON D90
13 / 13
A
Histograms
Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from those displayed in
imaging applications. Some sample histograms are shown below:
If the image contains objects with a wide range of
brightnesses, the distribution of tones will be relatively
even.
If the image is dark, tone distribution will be shifted to the
left.
If the image is bright, tone distribution will be shifted to the
right.
Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to the right, while
decreasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution to the left. Histograms can provide
a rough idea of overall exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to see
photographs in the monitor.
130
❚❚ Highlights *
1
2
3
High l i gh t s
N I KON D90
12/12
4
5
1 Protect status .................139 3 Image highlights ..........163
2 Retouch indicator .........209 4 Camera name
* Blinking areas indicate highlights for current channel.
5 Frame number/
total number of images
❚❚ Shooting Data Page 1 1
1
2
MTR, SPD, AP.
EXP. MODE, I SO
, EXP. TUN I NG
FOCAL LENGTH
LENS
AF / VR
FLASH MODE,
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
I
: , 1/ 250, F11
: , 200
: 0, + 1/6
: 35mm
: 18– 105
/ 3. 5–5.6
: A / VR– On
: Built – i n, TTL, +1. 0
CMD : M : TTL, +3. 0 A: TTL, +3. 0
B: OFF
C: OFF
10
N I KON D90
11
12/12
12
1 Protect status .................139
2 Retouch indicator .........209
3 Metering ............................87
Shutter speed............ 81, 83
Aperture...................... 82, 83
4 Shooting Mode..34, 41, 78
ISO sensitivity 2 ................74
1
2
3
4
5 Exposure
9 Flash mode........................71
compensation .............. 90
Flash compensation....... 91
Optimal exposure
10 Commander mode/group
tuning 3 ......................... 178
name/flash control
6 Focal length....................228
mode/flash
compensation............ 185
7 Lens data
11
Camera
name
8 Focus mode............... 54, 59
Lens VR (vibration
12 Frame number/
reduction) 4 .................... 26
total number of images
Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode (pg. 163).
Displayed in red if photo was taken with ISO sensitivity auto control on.
Displayed if Custom Setting b4 (Fine tune optimal exposure, pg. 178) has been set to a
value other than zero for any metering method.
Displayed only if VR lens is attached.
131
❚❚ Shooting Data Page 2 1
1
2
WHI TE BALANCE
COLOR SPACE
PI CTURE CNTRL
QUICK ADJUST
SHARPENING
CONTRAST
BRI GHTNESS
SATURATION
HUE
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
N I KON D90
12
1 Protect status .................139
2 Retouch indicator .........209
3 White balance ..................95
Color temperature.......99
White balance finetuning ..............................97
Preset manual ................100
4 Color space......................167
I
1
2
3
4
5
: AUTO, 0, 0
: s RGB
: STANDARD
:0
:3
:0
:0
:0
:0
12/12
13
5 Picture Control ..............108
6 Quick adjust 2 ................. 111
Original Picture
Control 3 ........................114
7 Sharpening ..................... 111
8 Contrast ...........................111
9 Brightness .......................111
10 Saturation 4..................... 111
Filter effects 5 ................. 111
11 Hue 4 ................................. 111
Toning 5............................ 111
12 Camera name
13 Folder number–
frame number
Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode (pg. 163).
Standard, Vivid, Portrait, and Landscape Picture Controls only.
Neutral, Monochrome, and custom Picture Controls.
Not displayed with monochrome Picture Controls.
Monochrome Picture Controls only.
❚❚ Shooting Data Page 3 *
1
3
4
5
6
2
NOI SE REDUC. : H I I SO, NORM
ACT. D–L I GHT. : NORMAL
: D– L I GHT I NG
RETOUCH
WARM TONE
CYANOTYPE
TRI M
: SPRI NG HAS COME. SP
COMMENT
RI NG HAS COME. 3636
N I KON D90
7
12/12
8
1 Protect status .................139 4 Active D-Lighting .........166 8 Folder number–
frame number
2 Retouch indicator .........209 5 Retouch history.............209
3 High ISO NR ....................168 6 Image comment ...........205
Long exposure NR ........167 7 Camera name
* Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode (pg. 163).
132
❚❚ GPS Data *
1
2
3
LATITUDE.
4
LONGITUDE
5
6
ALTITUDE
TIME(UTC)
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
N
35 º 36. 371'
E
139 º 43. 696'
35m
15/09/2008
01:15:29
N I KON D90
12/12
7
8
1 Protect status .................139 5 Altitude
8 Folder number–
frame number
2 Retouch indicator .........209 6 Coordinated Universal
Time (UTC)
3 Latitude
7 Camera name
4 Longitude
* Displayed only if GPS device was used when photo was taken (pg. 124).
I
133
❚❚ Overview Data
1
2
1 / 12
16
15
14
13
12
11
I
N I KON D90
4
5
1/ 250 F5. 6
200
+ 1. 0
–1. 3
REAR
10000
35mm
L
A6, M1
100NCD90 DSC_0001. JPG
15/09/2008 10: 15: 29
6
7
8
9
10
NOR
ORMAL
AL
4288x2848
1 Folder number/
frame number
2 Protect status .................139
3 Camera name
4 Retouch indicator .........209
5 Histogram showing the
9 Image comment
distribution of tones in
indicator....................... 205
the image (pg. 130).
10 Flash mode........................71
Horizontal axis
11 Flash compensation....... 91
corresponds to pixel
12 Exposure compensation
brightness, vertical axis
............................................90
shows number of pixels 13 Metering ............................87
of each brightness in
14 Mode .....................34, 41, 78
image.
15 Shutter speed............ 81, 83
6 ISO sensitivity * ................ 74
16 Aperture...................... 82, 83
7 Focal length....................228
8 GPS data indicator .......124
* Displayed in red if photo was taken with ISO sensitivity auto control on.
1 / 12
26
25
24
17
18
19
20
21
22
N I KON D90
1/ 250 F5. 6
HI 0. 3
+ 1. 0
–1. 3
REAR
10000
35mm
A6, M1
100NСD90 DSC_0001. JPG
15/09/2008 10 : 15: 29
23
134
3
22
19
N OR
ORMAL
AL
4288x2848
21
17
18
20
Picture Control...............108 23 Date of recording ........... 27 25 White balance ..................95
Color temperature..........99
Active D-Lighting .........119 24 Folder name ................... 162
White balance
File name ........................... 61
fine-tuning .....................97
Image quality ...................63
Preset
manual ............... 100
Image size..........................62
26 Color space..................... 167
Time of recording ...........27
Thumbnail Playback
To display images in “contact sheets” of four, nine, or 72 images, press the W button.
Full-frame
playback
To
Display more
images
Display fewer
images
Thumbnail
playback
Use
Description
W
Press W button to increase the number of images displayed.
Press X button to reduce the number of images displayed.
When four images are displayed, press to view highlighted
image full frame.
Use multi selector or command dials to highlight images for
full-frame playback, playback zoom (pg. 138), or deletion (pg.
140). Use main command dial to move cursor left or right,
sub-command dial to move cursor up or down.
X
Highlight images
View highlighted
image
Delete
highlighted
photo
Change protect
status of
highlighted
photo
Return to
shooting mode
Display menus
Calendar
playback
J
Press J to display the highlighted image full frame.
O
See page 140 for more information.
L
See page 139 for more information.
I
/ K Monitor will turn off. Photographs can be taken immediately.
G
See page 159 for more information.
135
Calendar Playback
To view images taken on a selected date, press the W button when 72 images are
displayed.
Full-frame
playback
Thumbnail
playback
Calendar
playback
Press the W button to toggle between the date list and the list of thumbnails for the
selected date. Use the multi selector to highlight dates in the date list or to highlight
pictures in the thumbnail list.
I
Date list
136
Thumbnail list
The operations can be performed depend on whether the cursor is in the date list or
the thumbnail list:
To
Toggle between date
list and thumbnail list
Exit to thumbnail
playback/Zoom in on
highlighted photo
Toggle full frame
playback
Use
W
X
• Date list: Exit to 72-frame playback.
• Thumbnail list: Zoom in on highlighted picture.
J
• Date list: View first picture taken on selected date.
• Thumbnail list: View highlighted picture.
• Date list: Highlight date.
• Thumbnail list: Highlight picture.
Highlight dates/
Highlight images
Delete highlighted
photo(s)
Change protect
status of highlighted
photo
Return to shooting
mode
Display menus
Description
Press W button in date list to place cursor in thumbnail
list. Press again to return to date list.
• Date list: Delete all pictures taken on selected date.
• Thumbnail list: Delete highlighted picture (pg. 140).
O
L
/K
G
See page 139 for more information.
I
Monitor will turn off. Photographs can be taken
immediately.
See page 159 for more information.
137
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom
Press the X button to zoom in on the image displayed in full-frame playback or on the
image currently highlighted in thumbnail or calendar playback. The following
operations can be performed while zoom is in effect:
To
Use
Zoom in or out
X/W
View other
areas of image
I
Select faces
Cancel zoom
J
Cancel zoom and return to full-frame playback.
View other
images
Change protect
status
Return to
shooting mode
Display menus
138
Description
Press X to zoom in to maximum of
approximately 27 × (large images),
20 × (medium images) or 13 × (small
images). Press W to zoom out. While
photo is zoomed in, use multi selector
to view areas of image not visible in
monitor. Keep multi selector pressed
to scroll rapidly to other areas of frame. Navigation window is
displayed when zoom ratio is altered; area currently visible in
monitor is indicated by yellow border.
Faces (up to 10) detected during zoom
are indicated by white borders in
navigation window. Rotate subcommand dial to scroll display to faces
without changing zoom ratio.
Rotate main command dial to view same location in other
images at current zoom ratio.
L
See page 139 for more information.
/ K Monitor will turn off. Photographs can be taken immediately.
G
See page 159 for more information.
Protecting Photographs from Deletion
In full-frame, zoom, thumbnail, and calendar playback, the L button can be used to
protect photographs from accidental deletion. Protected files can not be deleted
using the O button or the Delete option in the playback menu, and have DOS “readonly” status when viewed on a Windows computer. Note that protected images will
be deleted when the memory card is formatted (pp. 30, 202).
To protect a photograph:
1
Select an image.
Display the image in full-frame playback or playback zoom or highlight it in the
thumbnail list.
I
2
Press the L button.
The photograph will be marked with a P icon.
To remove protection from the photograph so
that it can be deleted, display the photograph or
highlight it in the thumbnail list and then press
the L button.
A
Removing Protection from All Images
To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently selected in the
Playback folder menu, press the L and O buttons together for about two seconds.
139
Deleting Individual Photographs
To delete the photograph displayed in full-frame playback or the photograph
highlighted in the thumbnail list, press the O button. Once deleted, photographs can
not be recovered.
1
Select an image.
Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list.
2
Press the O button.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed.
I
Full-frame playback
Thumbnail playback
To delete the photograph, press the O button again. To
exit without deleting the photograph, press the K
button.
A
See Also
To delete multiple images, use the Delete option in the playback menu (pg. 162). Use calendar
playback to delete all pictures taken on a selected date (pg. 136).
140
Pictmotion
The Pictmotion option in the playback menu (pg. 160) is used
to create and view slide shows with custom transitions and
background music. The following options are available:
Option
Start
Select pictures
Background music
Effects
Description
View the completed Pictmotion show.
Choose pictures for the Pictmotion show.
Choose background music.
Choose the transitions between pictures.
❚❚ Choosing Pictures
To select the pictures that will be included in the Pictmotion
show, choose Select pictures in the Pictmotion menu. The
following options will be displayed:
Option
Q Selected
Description
Select individual pictures for the show.
Select a date. All pictures taken on the selected
n Select date
date will appear in the show.
Create a show using all the pictures in the current
R All
playback folder.
I
Only pictures in the folder currently selected in the Playback folders (pg. 162) menu
can be included in the show. Hidden pictures and pictures that can not be viewed on
the camera will not be displayed.
A
Movies
Pictmotion shows can include movies, but only the first few seconds of each movie will be
displayed.
❚❚ Choosing Background Music
To choose background music for the Pictmotion show, select
Background music in the Pictmotion menu. Choose from
High-speed, Emotional, Natural, Up-tempo, and Relaxed.
❚❚ Transitions
To choose the transitions between pictures in the Pictmotion show, select Effects in
the Pictmotion menu. Choose from Zoom bounce, Zoom in/out, Blend, Wipe, and
Zoom out fade.
141
❚❚ Viewing the Pictmotion Show
To view the show, highlight Start in the Pictmotion menu and
press J. The following operations can be performed while the
show is in progress:
To
Pause slide show
Raise volume
Lower volume
Exit to playback
menu
Exit to playback
mode
Exit to shooting
mode
I
Use
J
X
W
G
K
Description
Pause show (see below).
Press X and W to raise and lower volume.
See page 159 for more information.
End show and return to playback mode.
Press shutter-release button halfway to
return to shooting mode.
A dialog shown at right is displayed when the show ends or
when the J button is pressed to pause playback. Select Restart
to restart (if the show was paused, it will resume from the next
picture) or Exit to return to the playback menu.
A
Transitions
Depending on the size of the images, transitions may not be displayed.
142
Slide Shows
The Slide show option in the playback menu (pg. 164) is used to display a slide show
of the pictures in the current playback folder (pg. 162). Hidden images (pg. 162) are
not displayed.
Option
Description
Start
Start slide show.
Frame interval Choose how long each picture will be displayed.
To start the slide show, highlight Start in the slide show menu and press J. The
following operations can be performed while the slide show is in progress:
To
Use
Description
Skip back/skip ahead
Press 4 to return to previous frame, 2 to skip to next frame.
View additional photo
info
Change photo info displayed (pg. 129).
Pause slide show
Exit to playback menu
Exit to playback mode
Exit to shooting mode
J
G
K
I
Pause show (see below).
See page 159 for more information.
End show and return to playback mode.
Press shutter-release button halfway to return to shooting
mode.
A dialog shown at right is displayed when the show ends or
when the J button is pressed to pause playback. Select Restart
to restart (if the show was paused, it will resume from the next
slide) or Exit to return to the playback menu.
143
I
144
QConnections
This chapter describes how to copy photographs to a computer, how to print
pictures, and how to view them on a television set.
Viewing Photographs on TV........................................................................................ 146
Standard Definition Devices ................................................................................................... 146
High-Definition Devices ........................................................................................................... 147
Connecting to a Computer .......................................................................................... 148
Before Connecting the Camera ............................................................................................. 148
Connecting the Camera............................................................................................................ 149
Printing Photographs ................................................................................................... 150
Q
145
Viewing Photographs on TV
The supplied EG-D2 audio video cable can be used to connect the camera to a
television or VCR for playback or recording. A type C mini-pin High-Definition
Multimedia Interface (HDMI) cable (available separately from third-party suppliers)
can be used to connect the camera to high-definition video devices.
Standard Definition Devices
To connect the camera to a standard television:
1
Turn the camera off.
Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting the video cable.
2
Connect the supplied audio video cable as shown.
Audio (white)
Video (yellow)
Q
Connect to
video device
Connect to
camera
3
Tune the television to the video channel.
4
Turn the camera on and press the K button.
During playback, images will be displayed both in the camera monitor and on
the television screen.
A
Video Mode (pg. 203)
Be sure that the video standard matches the standard used in the video device. Note that
resolution will drop when images are output on a PAL device.
A
Television Playback
Use of an EH-5a or EH-5 AC adapter (available separately) is recommended for extended
playback. When the EH-5a or EH-5 is connected, the camera monitor-off delay will be fixed at
ten minutes and the exposure meters will no longer turn off automatically. Note that the
edges may not be visible when photographs are viewed on a television screen.
146
High-Definition Devices
The camera can be connected to HDMI devices using a type C mini-pin HDMI cable
(available separately from third-party suppliers).
1
Turn the camera off.
Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting an HDMI cable.
2
Connect the HDMI cable as shown.
Connect to
camera
Connect to highdefinition device
(choose cable with
connector for
connected device)
3
Tune the device to the HDMI channel.
4
Turn the camera on and press the K button.
Q
During playback, images will be displayed on the high-definition television or
monitor screen; the camera monitor will remain off.
A
HDMI (pg. 203)
At the default setting of Auto, the camera automatically selects the appropriate HDMI format
for the high-definition device. The HDMI format can be chosen using the HDMI option in the
setup menu (pg. 203).
147
Connecting to a Computer
This section describes how to use the supplied UC-E4 USB cable to connect the
camera to a computer.
Before Connecting the Camera
Before connecting the camera, install the software on the supplied Software Suite CD
(see the Install Guide for more information). To ensure that data transfer is not
interrupted, be sure the camera battery is fully charged. If in doubt, charge the
battery before use or use an EH-5a or EH-5 AC adapter (available separately).
❚❚ Supported Operating Systems
Q
The camera can be connected to computers running the following operating
systems:
• Windows: Windows Vista Service Pack 1 (32-bit Home Basic/Home Premium/
Business/Enterprise/Ultimate) and Windows XP Service Pack 3 (Home Edition/
Professional). Users of Windows 2000 Professional Service Pack 4 can transfer
pictures by inserting the camera memory card in a card reader or card slot.
• Macintosh: Mac OS X (version 10.3.9, 10.4.11, 10.5.3)
See the websites listed on page xviii for the latest information on supported
operating systems.
❚❚ Supplied Software
Nikon Transfer is used to copy photographs from the camera to the computer, where
they can be viewed using ViewNX (Nikon Transfer can also be used to back up
photographs and embed information in photographs as they are transferred, while
ViewNX can be used to sort photographs, convert images to different file formats,
and perform simple editing on NEF/RAW photographs).
D
Connecting Cables
Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting interface cables. Do not use force
or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.
D
During Transfer
Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in progress.
A
Camera Control Pro 2
Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately; pg. 240) can be used to control the camera from a
computer. When Camera Control Pro 2 is running, “c” will be displayed in the control panel.
148
Connecting the Camera
Connect the camera using the supplied UC-E4 USB cable.
1
Turn the camera off.
2
Turn the computer on.
Power switch
Turn the computer on and wait for it to start up.
3
Connect the USB cable.
Connect the USB cable as shown. Do not use force or attempt to insert the
connectors at an angle.
Q
D
USB Hubs
Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not connect the cable via a USB hub or
keyboard.
4
Turn the camera on.
5
Transfer photographs.
Nikon Transfer will start automatically; click the Start Transfer button to
transfer photographs (for more information on using Nikon Transfer, select
Nikon Transfer help from the Nikon Transfer Help menu).
6
Turn the camera off and disconnect the USB cable when transfer ends.
Nikon Transfer will close automatically when transfer is complete.
149
Printing Photographs
JPEG photographs can be printed by any of the following methods:
• Connect the camera to a printer and print photographs directly from the camera
(see below).
• Insert the camera memory card in a printer equipped with a card slot (see the
printer manual for details). If the printer supports DPOF (pg. 274), photographs
can be selected for printing using Print set (DPOF) (pg. 157).
• Take the camera memory card to a developer or digital printer center. If the center
supports DPOF (pg. 274), photographs can be selected for printing using Print set
(DPOF) (pg. 157).
• Transfer pictures (pg. 148) and print them from a computer using ViewNX
(supplied; pg. 148) or Capture NX 2 (available separately; pg. 240).
NEF (RAW) photographs can only be printed using ViewNX or Capture NX 2 as
described above or by printing JPEG copies created using the NEF (RAW) processing
option in the retouch menu (pg. 220).
To print selected JPEG pictures on a PictBridge printer via a direct USB connection,
follow the steps below.
Q
Take photographs
Select photographs for printing
using Print set (DPOF) (pg. 157)
Connect camera to printer (pg. 151)
Print photographs
one at a time
(pg. 151)
Print multiple
photographs
(pg. 153)
Create index prints
(pg. 156)
Disconnect USB cable
A
Printing Via Direct USB Connection
Be sure the battery is fully charged or use an optional EH-5a or EH-5 AC adapter. When taking
photographs to be printed via direct USB connection in P, S, A, and M modes, set Color space to
sRGB (pg. 167).
150
❚❚ Connecting the Printer
Connect the camera using the supplied UC-E4 USB cable.
1
Turn the camera off.
2
Connect the USB cable.
Turn the printer on and connect the USB cable as shown. Do not use force or
attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.
DUSB Hubs
Connect the camera directly to the printer; do not connect the cable via a USB hub or
keyboard.
3
Q
Turn the camera on.
A welcome screen will be displayed in the monitor, followed by a PictBridge
playback display.
q
w
❚❚ Printing Pictures One at a Time
1
Select a picture.
Press 4 or 2 to view additional pictures, or
press 1 or 3 to view photo information (pg.
129). Press the X button to zoom in on the
current frame (pg. 138; press K to exit zoom).
To view six pictures at a time, press the W
button. Use the multi selector to highlight
pictures, or press X to display the highlighted
picture full frame.
151
2
Display printing options.
Press J to display PictBridge printing options.
3
Adjust printing options.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an option and press 2 to select.
Option
Description
Menu of page sizes will be displayed (options not
supported by current printer are not listed). Press 1 or
3
to choose page size (to print at default page size for
Page size
current printer, select Printer default), then press J
to select and return to previous menu.
Q
No. of
copies
Menu shown at right will be displayed. Press 1 or 3 to
choose number of copies (maximum 99), then press J
to select and return to previous menu.
Menu shown at right will be displayed. Press 1 or 3 to
choose print style from Printer default (print using
current printer settings), Print with border (print
Border
photo with white border), or No border, then press J
to select and return to previous menu. Only options
supported by current printer will be displayed.
Menu shown at right will be displayed. Press 1 or 3 to
choose Printer default (print using current printer
Time settings), Print time stamp (print time and date of
stamp recording on photo), or No time stamp, then press J
to select and return to previous menu. Only options
supported by current printer will be displayed.
Menu shown at right will be displayed. To exit without
cropping picture, highlight No cropping and press J.
To crop picture, highlight Crop and press 2.
Cropping
152
If Crop is selected, dialog shown at right will be
displayed. Press X to increase size of crop, W to
decrease. Choose position of crop using multi selector
and press J. Note that print quality may drop if small
crops are printed at large sizes.
4
Start printing.
Select Start printing and press J to start
printing. To cancel before all copies have been
printed, press J.
❚❚ Printing Multiple Pictures
1
Display the PictBridge menu.
Press the G button in the PictBridge playback display
(see Step 3 on page 151).
G button
Q
2
Choose an option.
Highlight one of the following options and
press 2.
•Print select: Select pictures for printing.
•Select date: Print one copy of all the pictures
taken on a selected date.
•Print (DPOF): Print an existing print order created with the Print set (DPOF)
option in the playback menu (pg. 160). The current print order will be
displayed in Step 3.
To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory card, select Index
print. See page 156 for more information.
153
3
Select pictures or choose a date.
If you chose Print select or Print (DPOF) in Step 2,
use the multi selector to scroll through the
pictures on the memory card. To display the
current picture full screen, press the X button.
To select the current picture for printing, press W button
the W button and press 1. The picture will be
marked with a Z icon and the number of prints
will be set to 1. Keeping the W button pressed,
press 1 or 3 to specify the number of prints (up
to 99; to deselect the picture, press 3 when the
number of prints is 1). Continue until all the
desired pictures have been selected.
Q
If you chose Select date in Step 2, press 1 or 3 to
highlight a date and press 2 to select. To view
the pictures taken on the selected date, press
W. Use the multi selector to scroll through the
pictures, or press X to view the current picture
full screen.
4
Display printing options.
Press J to display PictBridge printing options.
154
5
Adjust printing options.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an option and press 2 to select.
Option
Page
size
Border
Time
stamp
6
Description
Menu of page sizes will be displayed (pg. 152; options not supported by current
printer are not listed). Press 1 or 3 to choose page size (to print at default page
size for current printer, select Printer default), then press J to select and return
to previous menu.
Menu of border options will be displayed (pg. 152; options not supported by
current printer are not listed). Press 1 or 3 to choose print style from Printer
default (print at current printer settings), Print with border (print photo with
white border), or No border, then press J to select and return to previous menu.
Menu of time stamp options will be displayed (pg. 152; options not supported
by current printer are not listed). Press 1 or 3 to choose Printer default (print
at current printer settings), Print time stamp (print time and date of recording
on photo), or No time stamp, then press J to select and return to previous
menu.
Start printing.
Q
Select Start printing and press J to start
printing. To cancel before all copies have been
printed, press J.
D
Selecting Photographs for Printing
NEF (RAW) photographs (pg. 62) can not be selected for printing. JPEG copies of NEF (RAW)
images can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the retouch menu.
A
See Also
See page 250 for information on what to do if an error occurs during printing.
155
❚❚ Creating Index Prints
To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory card, select Index print
in Step 2 of “Printing Multiple Pictures” (pg. 153). Note that if the memory card
contains more than 256 pictures, only the first 256 images will be printed.
1
Select Index print.
Selecting Index print in the PictBridge menu
(pg. 153) displays the images on the memory
card as shown at right.
2
Display printing options.
Press J to display PictBridge printing options.
Q
3
Adjust printing options.
Choose page size, border, and time stamp options as described on page 147 (a
warning will be displayed if the selected page size is too small).
4
Start printing.
Select Start printing and press J to start
printing. To cancel before all copies have been
printed, press J.
156
❚❚ Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set
The Print set (DPOF) option in the playback menu is used to create digital “print
orders” for PictBridge-compatible printers and devices that support DPOF. Selecting
Print set (DPOF) from the playback menu displays the menu shown in Step 1.
1
Choose Select/set.
Highlight Select/set and press 2.
2
Select pictures.
Use the multi selector to scroll through the
pictures on the memory card. To display the
current picture in full screen, press X button. To
select the current picture for printing, press the
W button
W button and press 1. The picture will be
marked with a Z icon and the number of prints
will be set to 1. Keeping the W button pressed,
press 1 or 3 to specify the number of prints (up
to 99; to deselect the picture, press 3 when the
number of prints is 1). Press J when all the
desired pictures have been selected.
3
Q
Select imprint options.
Highlight the following options and press 2 to
toggle the highlighted option on or off (to
complete the print order without including this
information, proceed to Step 4).
•Data imprint: Print shutter speed and aperture on all pictures in print order.
•Imprint date: Print date of recording on all pictures in print order.
4
Complete the print order.
Highlight Done and press J to complete the
print order.
157
D
Print Set (DPOF)
To print the current print order when the camera is connected to a PictBridge printer, select
Print (DPOF) in the PictBridge menu and follow the steps in “Printing Multiple Pictures” to
modify and print the current order (pg. 153). DPOF date and data imprint options are not
supported when printing via direct USB connection; to print the date of recording on
photographs in the current print order, use the PictBridge Time stamp option.
The Print set (DPOF) option can not be used if there is not enough space on the memory card
to store the print order.
NEF (RAW) photographs (pg. 62) can not be selected using this option. JPEG copies of NEF
(RAW) images can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the retouch menu.
Print orders may not print correctly if images are deleted using a computer or other device
after the print order is created.
Q
158
MMenu Guide
The current menu is displayed by pressing the G button; to select from the menus
listed below, press 4. This chapter describes the options available in the menus
below.
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images ............................................................... 160
C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options ............................................................... 165
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings................................................. 171
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup.............................................................................. 202
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies................................................ 209
m Recent Settings/O My Menu................................................................................... 224
o
i
L
g
u
w
159
D The Playback Menu:
Managing Images
The playback menu contains the options listed below. To display the playback menu,
press G and press 4 to highlight the tab for current menu, then press 1 or 3 to
highlight the playback menu tab; for more information, see page 19.
Option
Delete
Playback folder
Hide image
Display mode
Image review
See page
162
162
162
163
163
Option
Rotate tall
Pictmotion
Slide show
Print set (DPOF)
See page
163
141
143
157
Selecting Multiple Pictures
To select multiple pictures for Delete (pg. 162), Hide image (pg. 162), Pictmotion
(pg. 163), and direct printing (pg. 150):
❚❚ Thumbnail Selection
To choose pictures from a list of thumbnails, select the “Selected,” “Select/Set,” “Print
select,” or “Print (DPOF)” option and follow the steps below.
o
1
Highlight a picture.
Use the multi selector to highlight a picture (to
view the highlighted picture full screen, press
and hold the X button).
2
Select the highlighted picture.
W button
Press the W button to select the
highlighted picture. Selected
pictures are marked by an icon.
When selecting pictures for printing,
press the W button and press 1 or
3 to choose the number of copies.
3
Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select additional pictures.
To deselect a picture, highlight it and press the W button.
160
4
Press J to complete the operation.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed;
highlight Yes and press J.
❚❚ Date Selection
To choose a date, select the “Select date” option and follow the steps below.
1
Highlight a date.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a date.
To view the pictures taken on the
highlighted date, press W. Use the
multi selector to scroll through the
pictures, or press X to view the
current picture full screen. Press W
to return to the date list.
2
X button
Select the highlighted date.
o
Press 2 in the date list or J in the thumbnail list
to select all pictures taken on the highlighted
date. Selected dates are marked with a M icon.
3
Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select additional pictures.
To deselect a date, highlight it and press 2. To deselect a selected date in the
thumbnail list, press J.
4
Press J to complete the operation.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed;
highlight Yes and press J.
161
Delete
The delete menu contains the following options:
Option
Description
Q Selected
Delete selected pictures.
n Select date Delete all pictures taken on a selected date.
R All
Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for playback.
D
Protected and Hidden Images
Images that are protected or hidden will not be deleted.
Playback Folder
Choose a folder for playback:
Option
Description
Only photos in the folder currently selected for Active folder in the shooting menu
are displayed during playback. This option is selected automatically when a photo
Current
is taken. If a memory card is inserted and this option selected before photos have
(default)
been taken, a message stating that the folder contains no images will be displayed
during playback. Select All to begin playback.
All
Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback.
o Hide Image
Hide or reveal selected pictures. Hidden pictures are visible only in the Hide image
menu and can only be deleted by formatting the memory card.
Option
Description
Q Select/set
Hide or reveal selected pictures.
n Select date Hide or reveal all pictures taken on a selected date.
R Deselect all? Reveal all pictures.
D
Protected and Hidden Images
Revealing a protected image will also remove protection from the image.
162
Display Mode
Choose the information available in the playback photo
information display (pg. 129). Press 1 or 3 to highlight an
option, then press 2 to select the option for the photo
information display. A M appears next to selected items; to
deselect, highlight and press 2. To return to the playback
menu, highlight Done and press J.
Option
Description
Detailed photo info
Highlights are shown in photo information display. Very bright areas blink on
Highlights
and off.
RGB
Red, green, and blue histograms are displayed in photo information display.
histogram
Shooting data pages (including camera name, metering, exposure, focal
Data
length, white balance, and image options) appear in photo information
display.
Image Review
Choose whether pictures are automatically displayed in the monitor immediately
after shooting.
o
Option
Description
On (default) Pictures are automatically displayed in the monitor after shooting.
Off
Pictures can only be displayed by pressing K button.
Rotate Tall
Choose whether to rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures for display during
playback. Note that because the camera itself is already in the appropriate
orientation during shooting, images are not rotated automatically during image
review (pg. 128).
Option
Description
“Tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures are automatically rotated for display in the
On
camera monitor. Pictures taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation
(default)
(pg. 205) will be displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation.
Off
“Tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures are displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation.
Pictmotion
Create and view slide shows with custom transitions and background music (pg.
141).
163
Slide Show
Play pictures back one at a time in a simple automated slide show (pg. 143).
Print Set (DPOF)
Choose Select/set to select pictures for printing on a DPOF-compatible device (pg.
157). Choose Deselect all? to remove all pictures from the current print order.
o
164
C The Shooting Menu:
Shooting Options
The shooting menu contains the options listed below. To display the shooting menu,
press G and press 4 to highlight the tab for current menu, then press 1 or 3 to
highlight the shooting menu tab; for more information, see page 19.
Option
Set Picture Control
Manage Picture Control
Image quality
Image size
White balance
ISO sensitivity settings
Active D-Lighting
See page
108
113
62
63
95
166
119
Option
Color space
Long exp. NR
High ISO NR
Active folder
Multiple exposure
Movie setting
See page
167
167
168
169
121
170
Set Picture Control
Select from the Picture Controls provided with the camera to instantly adjust image
processing settings (pg 108). This option is available in P, S, A, and M modes only.
Manage Picture Control
Save and modify custom Picture Control combinations, or copy custom Picture
Controls to or from the memory card (pg. 113). This option is available in P, S, A, and M
modes only.
i
Image Quality
Choose image quality (pg. 62). This option is available in all modes.
Image Size
Choose the size at which pictures are recorded (pg. 63). This option is available in all
modes.
White Balance
Adjust white balance settings (pg. 95). This option is available in P, S, A, and M modes
only.
165
ISO Sensitivity Settings
Adjust ISO sensitivity (pg. 74). This option is available in all modes.
❚❚ ISO Sensitivity Auto Control (P, S, and A Modes Only)
If Off (the default setting) is chosen for ISO sensitivity auto
control, ISO sensitivity will remain fixed at the value selected by
the user (see page 74). When On is chosen, ISO sensitivity will
automatically be adjusted if optimal exposure can not be
achieved at the value selected by the user (flash level is
adjusted appropriately). The maximum value for auto ISO
sensitivity can be selected using the Maximum sensitivity
option in the ISO sensitivity auto control menu (choose lower
values to prevent noise; the minimum value for auto ISO
sensitivity is automatically set to ISO 200). In exposure modes
P and A, sensitivity will only be adjusted if underexposure would
result at the shutter speed selected for Minimum shutter
speed. Slower shutter speeds will be used only if optimum exposure can not be
achieved at the ISO sensitivity value selected for Maximum sensitivity.
When On is selected, the control panel and viewfinder show
ISO-AUTO. These indictors blink when sensitivity is altered from
the value selected by the user.
i
A
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
Noise is more likely at higher sensitivities. Use the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu
to reduce noise (see page 168). Foreground subjects may be underexposed in photos taken
with the flash at slow shutter speeds, in daylight, or against a bright background. Choose a
flash mode other than slow sync or select exposure mode A or M and choose a larger aperture.
Note that when the flash is used, the camera uses the shutter speed selected for Custom
Setting e1 (Flash shutter speed, pg. 185) in place of the value selected for Minimum shutter
speed.
Active D-Lighting
This option can be used to prevent loss of detail in highlights and shadows (pg. 119).
The default setting is Auto. This option is available in P, S, A, and M modes only.
166
Color Space
The color space determines the gamut of colors available for color reproduction.
Choose a color space according to how photographs will be processed on leaving the
camera. This option is available in all modes.
Option
Description
Choose for photographs that will be printed or used “as is,” with no
W sRGB (default)
further modification.
This color space is capable of expressing a wider gamut of colors than
X Adobe RGB
sRGB, making it the preferred choice for images that will be extensively
processed or retouched.
A
Color Space
Color spaces define the correspondence between colors and the numeric values that
represent them in a digital image file. The sRGB color space is widely used, while the Adobe
RGB color space is typically used in publishing and commercial printing. sRGB is
recommended when taking photographs that will be printed without modification or viewed
in applications that do not support color management, or when taking photographs that will
be printed with ExifPrint, the direct printing option on some household printers, or kiosk
printing or other commercial print services. Adobe RGB photographs can also be printed using
these options, but colors will not be as vivid.
JPEG photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space are DCF compliant; applications and
printers that support DCF will select the correct color space automatically. If the application or
device does not support DCF, select the appropriate color space manually. For more
information, see the documentation provided with the application or device.
A
Nikon Software
ViewNX (supplied) and Capture NX 2 (available separately) automatically select the correct
color space when opening photographs created with this camera.
i
Long Exp. NR (Long Exposure Noise Reduction)
Choose whether to reduce noise in pictures taken at slow shutter speeds. This option
is available in all modes.
Option
Description
Photographs taken at shutter speeds slower than 8 s
are processed to reduce noise. The time required for
processing is roughly equal to the current shutter
speed; during processing, “l m” will blink in the
shutter speed/aperture displays and photographs can
On
not be taken. In continuous release mode, frame rates
will slow and the capacity of the memory buffer will
drop. Noise reduction is not visible in pictures played
back before processing is complete; noise reduction will not be performed if
the camera is turned off before processing is complete.
Off (default) Long exposure noise reduction off.
167
High ISO NR
Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to reduce “noise.” This
option is available in all modes.
Option
S High
Normal
T
(default)
U Low
Off
i
168
Description
Noise reduction is performed at ISO sensitivities of ISO 800 and higher. While
photographs are being processed, the capacity of the memory buffer will
drop. Choose the amount of noise reduction performed from High, Normal,
and Low.
Noise reduction is only performed at sensitivities of Hi 0.3 and higher. The
amount of noise reduction is less than the amount performed when Low is
selected for High ISO NR.
Active Folder
Create, rename, or delete folders, or choose the folder in which subsequent
photographs will be stored. This option is available in all modes.
• Select folder: Choose the folder in which subsequent photographs will be stored.
NCD90
(default folder)
Current folder
Other folders
(in alphabetical order)
• New: Create a new folder and name it as described below.
• Rename: Select a folder from the list and rename it as described below.
• Delete: Delete all empty folders on the memory card.
❚❚ Naming and Renaming Folders
Folder names can be up to five characters long. To
Keyboard
move the cursor in the name area, press the W button
area
and press 4 or 2. To enter a new letter at the current
Name area
cursor position, use the multi selector to highlight the
desired character in the keyboard area and press the X
button. To delete the character at the current cursor position, press the O button.
Press J to save changes and return to the shooting menu, or press G to exit
without creating a new folder or changing the folder name.
i
D
Folder Names
On the memory card, folder names are preceded by a three-digit folder number assigned
automatically by the camera (e.g., 100NCD90). Each folder can contain up to 999 photographs.
During shooting, pictures are stored in the highest-numbered folder with the selected name.
If a photograph is taken when the current folder is full or contains a photograph numbered
9999, the camera will create a new folder by adding one to the current folder number (e.g.,
101NCD90). The camera treats folders with the same name but different folder numbers as the
same folder. For example, if the folder NIKON is selected for Active folder, photographs in all
folders named NIKON (100NIKON, 101NIKON, 102NIKON, etc.) will be visible when Current is
selected for Playback folder (pg. 162). Renaming changes all folders with the same name but
leaves the folder numbers intact.
169
Multiple Exposure
Create a single photograph from two to three exposures (pg. 121). This option is
available in P, S, A, and M modes only.
Movie setting
Choose a frame size and sound options for movies (pg. 50). This option is available in
all modes.
❚❚ Quality
Choose a frame size.
Option
Description
Record movies at a frame rate of 24 fps. Each frame is 1280 × 720
3 1280×720 (16:9)
pixels in size. Choose for higher quality.
640×424 (3:2)
Record movies at a frame rate of 24 fps. Each frame is 640 × 424
4
pixels in size.
(default)
Record movies at a frame rate of 24 fps. Each frame is 320 × 216
5 320×216 (3:2)
pixels in size. Choose for reduced file size.
❚❚ Sound
Choose On (the default setting) to record monaural sound with movies, Off to record
silent movies.
i
170
A Custom Settings:
Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Custom Settings are used to customize camera
settings to suit individual preferences. To display
the Custom Settings menu, press G and press 4
to highlight the tab for current menu, then press 1
or 3 to highlight the Custom Settings tab; for
more information, see page 19.
Custom Setting groups
Main menu
L
A: Reset custom
settings (pg. 172)
171
The following Custom Settings are available:
A
a
a1
a2
a3
a4
a5
a6
a7
b
b1
b2
b3
b4
c
c1
c2
c3
c4
c5
d
d1
d2
d3
Custom Setting
Reset custom settings
Autofocus
AF-area mode
Center focus point
Built-in AF-assist illuminator
AF point illumination
Focus point wrap-around
AE-L/AF-L for MB-D80
Live view autofocus
Metering/exposure
EV steps for exposure cntrl.
Easy exposure compensation
Center-weighted area
Fine tune optimal exposure
Timers/AE lock
Shutter-release button AE-L
Auto meter-off delay
Self-timer
Monitor off delay
Remote on duration
Shooting/display
Beep
Viewfinder grid display
ISO display and adjustment
Page
172
172
174
174
175
175
176
176
177
177
178
178
179
179
179
180
180
180
181
181
d
d4
d5
d6
d7
d8
d9
d10
d11
d12
e
e1
e2
e3
e4
e5
e6
f
f1
f2
f3
f4
f5
f6
f7
Custom Setting
Shooting/display
Viewfinder warning display
Screen tips
CL mode shooting speed
File number sequence
Shooting info display
LCD illumination
Exposure delay mode
Flash warning
MB-D80 battery type
Bracketing/flash
Flash shutter speed
Flash cntrl for built-in flash
Modeling flash
Auto bracketing set
Auto FP
Bracketing order
Controls
D switch
OK button (shooting mode)
Assign FUNC. button
Assign AE-L/AF-L button
Customize command dials
No memory card?
Reverse indicators
Page
A: Reset Custom Settings
L
Choose whether to restore default settings for the current Custom Settings. See
page 260 for a list of default settings. Custom Settings are not reset when a twobutton reset is performed.
Option
Description
Yes Restore defaults for the current Custom Settings (pg. 260).
No Exit without changing Custom Settings.
172
181
182
182
182
183
183
183
183
184
185
185
191
191
195
195
196
196
197
200
201
201
201
a: Autofocus
a1: AF-area Mode
This option (available in all shooting modes) determines how the focus point for
autofocus is selected. Choose from the following options:
Option
K
I
H
f
Description
User selects focus point using multi selector; camera focuses on subject in
Single point selected focus point only. Use with stationary subjects. Default setting
for n mode.
In AF-A and AF-C autofocus modes, user selects focus point manually, but
camera will focus based on information from surrounding focus points if
Dynamic
subject briefly leaves selected point. Use with erratically moving
area
subjects. In AF-S autofocus mode, user selects focus point manually; camera
focuses on subject in selected focus point only. Default for m mode.
Camera automatically detects subject and selects focus point. If type G or
D lens is used, camera can distinguish human subjects from background
Auto-area
for improved subject detection. Default for i, j, k, l, o, P, S, A, and M
modes.
In AF-A and AF-C autofocus modes, user selects focus point using multi selector.
If user changes composition after focusing, camera uses 3D-tracking to
select new focus point and keep focus locked on original subject while
shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Use to recompose
3D-tracking
photographs while shooting relatively static subjects. If subject leaves
(11 points)
viewfinder, remove your finger from shutter-release button and
recompose photograph with subject in selected focus point. In AF-S
autofocus mode, user selects focus point manually; camera focuses on
subject in selected focus point only.
The current setting is shown in the shooting information display
(pg. 10).
L
A
3D-tracking (11 Points)
When the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the colors in the area surrounding the
focus point are stored in the camera. Consequently 3D-tracking may not produce the desired
results with subjects that are the same color as the background.
173
a2: Center Focus Point
This option (available in all shooting modes) determines the size of the center focus
point.
Option
c
Normal zone
(default)
7 Wide zone
Viewfinder display
Description
Focus on stationary subjects that can be easily framed
in the focus point.
Focus on moving subjects. Not available when Autoarea is selected for Custom Setting a1 (AF-area
mode).
See page 54 for more information on focus settings.
a3: Built-in AF-assist Illuminator
Choose whether the built-in AF-assist illuminator lights to assist
the focus operation when lighting is poor. This option is
available in all shooting modes except l and m.
Option
L
Description
If the subject is poorly lit, the AF-assist illuminator will light to assist the focus
operation in single-servo AF (AF-S selected for autofocus mode, or single-servo AF
On
selected in AF-A autofocus mode) when Single point, Auto-area, or 3D-tracking
(default)
(11 points) is selected for Custom Setting a1 (AF-area mode) or when Custom
Setting a1 is set to Dynamic area and the center focus point is selected.
The AF-assist illuminator does not light to assist the focus operation. The camera
Off
may not be able to focus using autofocus when lighting is poor.
A
The AF-Assist Illuminator
The AF-assist illuminator has a range of about 0.5–3.0 m (1 ft. 8 in.–9 ft. 10 in.); when using the
illuminator, use a lens with a focal length of 24–200 mm and remove the lens hood.
A
See Also
See page 231 for restrictions on the lenses that can be used with AF assist.
174
a4: AF Point Illumination
Choose whether the active focus point is highlighted in red in the viewfinder. This
option is available in all shooting modes.
Option
Description
Auto The selected focus point is automatically highlighted as needed to establish
(default) contrast with the background.
The selected focus point is always highlighted, regardless of the brightness of the
On
background. Depending on the brightness of the background, the selected focus
point may be difficult to see.
Off
The selected focus point is not highlighted.
a5: Focus Point Wrap-Around
Choose whether focus-point selection “wraps around” from one edge of the
viewfinder to another. This option is available in all shooting modes.
Option
Description
Focus-point selection “wraps around” from top to
bottom, bottom to top, right to left, and left to right,
so that, for example, pressing 2 when a focus point at
Wrap
the right edge of the viewfinder display is highlighted
(q) selects the corresponding focus point at the left
edge of the display (w).
The focus-area display is bounded by the outermost focus points so that, for
No wrap
example, pressing 2 when a focus point at the right edge of the display is selected
(default)
has no effect.
L
175
a6: AE-L/AF-L for MB-D80
Choose the function assigned to the AE-L/AF-L
button on the optional MB-D80 battery pack. This
option is available in all shooting modes.
Option
Description
AE/AF lock *
Focus and exposure lock while the MB-D80 AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.
B
(default)
C AE lock only * Exposure locks while the MB-D80 AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.
F AF lock only * Focus locks while the MB-D80 AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.
Exposure locks when the MB-D80 AE-L/AF-L button is pressed, and
AE lock
E
remains locked until the button is pressed a second time or the exposure
(Hold)
meters turn off.
A AF-ON *
Pressing the MB-D80 AE-L/AF-L button initiates autofocus.
Flash value for the built-in flash and optional SB-900, SB-800, SB-600,
SB-400, and SB-R200 flash units locks when the MB-D80 AE-L/AF-L
r FV lock
button is pressed (pg. 198), and remains locked until the button is
pressed a second time or the exposure meters turn off.
Focus point The focus point (pg. 56) can be selected by pressing the MB-D80 AE-L/
x
selection
AF-L button and rotating the sub-command dial.
* Pressing 2 when these options are highlighted displays a Focus point selection sub-menu.
If On is selected, the focus point can be chosen by pressing the MB-D80 AE-L/AF-L button
and rotating the sub-command dial.
a7: Live View Autofocus
L
This option (available in all shooting modes) determines how the focus point for
autofocus is selected in live view. Choose from the following options:
Mode
Description
The camera automatically detects and focuses on portrait subjects
8 Face priority
facing camera. Use for portraits; default for k and o modes.
Use for hand-held shots of landscapes and other non-portrait subjects.
Wide area
9
The focus point can be selected manually. Default for i, j, l, m, P, S, A,
(default)
and M modes.
Use for pin-point focus on a selected spot in the frame. A tripod is
! Normal area
recommended. Default setting for n mode.
176
b: Metering/Exposure
b1: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl.
This option (available in all shooting modes) determines whether adjustments to
shutter speed, aperture, exposure compensation, flash compensation, and bracketing
are made in increments equivalent to 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV.
Option
Description
Changes to shutter speed, aperture, exposure compensation, and flash
1/3 step
H
compensation are in increments equivalent to 1/3 EV. The bracketing increment
(default)
can be selected from 1/3, 2/3, and 1 EV.
Changes to shutter speed, aperture, exposure compensation, and flash
I 1/2 step compensation are in increments equivalent to 1/2 EV. The bracketing increment
can be selected from 1/2 and 1 EV.
b2: Easy Exposure Compensation
This option (available in P, S, A, and M modes) controls whether the E button is needed
to set exposure compensation (pg. 90). If On is selected, the 0 at the center of the
exposure display will blink even when exposure compensation is set to ±0.
Option
Description
Exposure compensation can be set by rotating one of the command dials (see note
On
below). Selected value does not change when exposure meters turn off, camera is
turned off, or Off is selected for Custom Setting b2.
Off
Exposure compensation is set by pressing the E button and rotating the main
(default) command dial.
A
Change Main/Sub
The dial used to set exposure compensation when On is selected for Custom Setting b2 (Easy
exposure compensation) depends on the option selected for Custom Setting f5 (Customize
command dials) > Change main/sub (pg. 201).
Exposure
mode
P
S
A
M
L
Customize command dials > Change main/sub
Off (default)
On
Sub-command dial
Sub-command dial
Sub-command dial
Main command dial
Main command dial
Sub-command dial
N/A
177
b3: Center-Weighted Area
When calculating exposure, center-weighted metering
assigns the greatest weight to a circle in the center of the
frame. The diameter (φ ) of this circle can be set to 6, 8, or
10 mm. This option is available in P, S, A, and M modes only.
Option
M φ 6 mm
L φ 8 mm (default)
N φ 10 mm
b4: Fine Tune Optimal Exposure
Use this option (available in all shooting modes) to fine-tune the exposure value
selected by the camera. Exposure can be fine tuned separately for each metering
method by from +1 to –1 EV in steps of 1/6 EV.
D
Fine-Tuning Exposure
Exposure can be fine-tuned separately for each Custom Settings bank and is not affected by
two-button resets. Note that as the exposure compensation (E) icon is not displayed, the only
way to determine how much exposure has been altered is to view the amount in the finetuning menu. Exposure compensation (pg. 90) is preferred in most situations.
L
178
c: Timers/AE Lock
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L
At the default setting of Off, exposure only locks when the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.
If On is selected, exposure will also lock when the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway. This option is available in all shooting modes.
c2: Auto Meter-off Delay
This option (available in all shooting modes) controls how long
the camera continues to meter exposure when no operations are
performed. Choose from 4 s, 6 s, 8 s, 16 s, 30 s, 1 minute,
5 minutes, 10 minutes, or 30 minutes. The shutter-speed and
aperture displays in the control panel and viewfinder turn off
automatically when the exposure meters turn off.
Choose a shorter meter-off delay for longer battery life. When
the camera is powered by an optional EH-5a or EH-5 AC adapter,
the exposure meters will not turn off automatically.
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Option
4s
6 s (default)
8s
16 s
30 s
1 min.
5 min.
10 min.
30 min.
c3: Self-Timer
This option (available in all shooting modes) controls the length
of the shutter release delay (Self-timer delay; see right) and the
number of shots (Number of shots; choose a value from 1–9)
taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed in selftimer mode (at values other than 1, pictures will be taken at the
rate selected for ! mode; pg. 182).
Self-timer delay
a 2s
b 5s
c 10 s (default)
d 20 s
L
179
c4: Monitor off Delay
This option (available in all shooting modes) controls how long
the monitor remains on when no operations are performed
during playback, image review, or when menus or shooting
information is displayed. Choose from 4 s (the default for image
review), 10 s (the default for playback and shooting information),
20 s (the default for menus), 1 minute, 5 minutes, or 10 minutes.
Choose a shorter monitor-off delay for longer battery life.
Regardless of the setting chosen, the monitor remains on if no
operations are performed for about ten minutes when the
camera is powered by an optional EH-5a or EH-5 AC adapter.
Option
9 4s
e 10 s
f 20 s
g 1 min.
h 5 min.
i 10 min.
c5: Remote on Duration
Choose how long the camera will wait for a signal from the
remote before cancelling delayed or quick-response remote
modes (pg. 68). Choose shorter times for longer battery life.
The default setting is one minute.
This option is available in all shooting modes.
u
v
w
x
Option
1 min. (default)
5 min.
10 min.
15 min.
d: Shooting/Display
d1: Beep
L
At the default setting of On, a beep will sound when the camera focuses in singleservo AF (5 or when shooting stationary subjects in 4 autofocus mode), while
the release timer is counting down in self-timer and delayed remote modes (pg. 66,
68), or when a photograph is taken in quick-response remote mode (pg. 68). The
beep will not sound when Off is selected.
This option is available in all shooting modes. The current setting
is shown in the control panel: 3 is displayed when the beep is on,
2 when it is off.
180
d2: Viewfinder Grid Display
Choose On to display on-demand grid lines in the viewfinder for reference when
composing photographs. The default setting is Off. This option is available in all
shooting modes.
d3: ISO Display and Adjustment
Choose Show ISO sensitivity (y) or Show ISO/Easy ISO (z) to display the
current ISO sensitivity setting in the frame count displays in the control panel and
viewfinder. If Show ISO/Easy ISO (z) is selected, ISO sensitivity can be set by
rotating the sub-command dial (modes P and S) or main command dial (mode A).
Choose Show frame count (the default setting) to show the number of exposures
remaining in the frame count displays.
This option is available in all shooting modes.
d4: Viewfinder Warning Display
Choose On (the default setting) to display the following warnings in the viewfinder:
Icon
l
d
m
Description
Displayed when a monochrome Picture Control is selected.
Displayed when the battery is low.
Displayed when no memory card is inserted.
These warnings are not displayed if Off is selected. This option is available in all
shooting modes.
L
181
d5: Screen Tips
Choose On (the default setting) to display tips for items selected in the shooting
information display, Off to turn tip display off. This option is available in all shooting
modes.
d6: CL Mode Shooting Speed
This option (available in all shooting modes) determines the maximum frame
advance rate in ! (continuous low speed) release mode. Choose from values
between one and four frames per second (fps); the default setting is 3 fps. Note that
the frame advance rate may drop below the selected value at slow shutter speeds.
d7: File Number Sequence
When a photograph is taken, the camera names the file by adding one to the last file
number used. This option (available in all shooting modes) controls whether file
numbering continues from the last number used when a new folder is created, the
memory card is formatted, or a new memory card is inserted in the camera.
Option
L
Description
When a new folder is created, the memory card formatted, or a new memory
card inserted in the camera, file numbering continues from the last number
used or from the largest file number in the current folder, whichever is higher.
On
If a photograph is taken when the current folder contains a photograph
numbered 9999, a new folder will be created automatically and file numbering
will begin again from 0001.
File numbering is reset to 0001 when a new folder is created, the memory card
Off
is formatted, or a new memory card is inserted in the camera. Note that a new
(default) folder is created automatically if a photograph is taken when the current folder
contains 999 photographs.
Same as for On, except that the next photograph taken is assigned a file
number by adding one to the largest file number in the current folder. If the
J Reset
folder is empty, file numbering is reset to 0001.
D
File Number Sequence
If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains either 999 photographs or a photograph
numbered 9999, the shutter-release button will be disabled and no further photographs can
be taken. Choose Reset for Custom Setting d7 (File number sequence) and then either
format the current memory card or insert a new memory card.
182
d8: Shooting Info Display
At the default setting of v Auto, the color of the lettering in the information
display (pg. 10) will automatically change from black to white or white to black in
response to ambient lighting conditions. To always use the same color lettering,
select Manual and choose w Dark on light (black lettering) or x Light on dark
(white lettering). Monitor brightness will automatically be adjusted for maximum
contrast with the selected text color.
Dark on light
Light on dark
This option is available in all shooting modes.
d9: LCD Illumination
At the default setting of Off, the control panel backlight (LCD illuminator) will only
light while the power switch is in the D position. If On is selected, the control panel
will be illuminated while the exposure meters are active (pg. 35). Select Off for
increased battery life.
This option is available in all shooting modes.
d10: Exposure Delay Mode
At the default setting of Off, shutter is released when the shutter-release button is
pressed. In situations where the slightest camera movement can blur pictures, On
can be selected to delay shutter release until about 1 s after the shutter-release
button is pressed and the mirror is raised. This option is available in all shooting
modes.
L
d11: Flash Warning
In P, S, A, and M modes, the flash must be raised manually before use. If On (the default
setting) is selected for this option and lighting is poor, the flash-ready light (M) will
flicker in the viewfinder when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway to warn
that the built-in flash is required. No warning will be displayed if Off is selected. This
option is available in P, S, A, and M modes only.
183
d12: MB-D80 Battery Type
To ensure that the camera functions as expected when AA batteries are used in the
optional MB-D80 battery pack, match the option selected in this menu (available in
all shooting modes) to the type of batteries inserted in the battery pack. There is no
need to adjust this option when using EN-EL3e batteries.
1
2
3
4
Option
LR6 (AA alkaline) (default)
HR6 (AA Ni-MH)
FR6 (AA lithium)
ZR6 (AA Ni-Mn)
Description
Select when using LR6 alkaline AA batteries.
Select when using HR6 Ni-MH AA batteries.
Select when using FR6 lithium AA batteries.
Select when using ZR6 Ni-Mn AA batteries.
A
Using AA Batteries
EN-EL3e rechargeable Li-ion batteries are recommended for best performance. Fewer pictures
can be taken with AA batteries (pg. 275). The capacity of AA batteries drops sharply at
temperatures below 20 °C (68 °F) and varies with make and storage conditions; in some cases,
batteries may cease to function before their expiry date. Some AA batteries can not be used;
due to their performance characteristics and limited capacity, alkaline and nickel-manganese
batteries should only be used if no alternative is available and then only at warmer
temperatures. The camera shows the level of AA batteries as follows:
Control panel
L
I
H
(blinks)
Viewfinder
Description
—
Batteries fully charged.
d
Low battery. Ready fresh batteries.
d
Battery exhausted; shutter release disabled. Change batteries.
(blinks)
Battery level for EN-EL3e rechargeable Li-ion batteries is displayed normally.
L
A
The MB-D80 Battery Pack
The MB-D80 takes one or two EN-EL3e rechargeable Li-ion battery or six AA alkaline, Ni-MH,
lithium, or nickel manganese batteries (an EN-EL3e is supplied with the camera). Higher frame
rates are available with AA batteries; note, however, that in the case of AA batteries the frame
rate will decrease as battery level drops.
The shooting information display shows the type of battery inserted in
the MB-D80 as follows:
MB-D80 battery type display
Battery type
u
EN-EL3e rechargeable Li-ion battery
w
AA batteries
184
e: Bracketing/Flash
e1: Flash Shutter Speed
This option (available only in P and A modes) determines the slowest shutter speed
available when using front- or rear-curtain sync or red-eye reduction in modes P and
A (regardless of the setting chosen, shutter speeds can be as slow as 30 s in modes S
and M or at flash settings of slow sync, slow rear-curtain sync, or red-eye reduction
with slow sync). Options range from 1/60 s (1/60 s, the default setting) to 30 s (30 s).
e2: Flash Cntrl for Built-in Flash
Choose the flash mode for the built-in flash. This option is available in P, S, A, and M
modes only.
Option
TTL
1
(default)
2 Manual
Repeating
3
flash
Commander
4
mode
Description
Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to shooting conditions.
Choose the flash level (pg. 187).
The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter is open, producing a strobelight effect (pg. 187).
Use the built-in flash as a master flash controlling one or more remote
optional flash units (pg. 188).
A
“Manual” and “Repeating Flash”
Y icons blink in the control panel and viewfinder when these options are selected.
A
The SB-400
When an optional SB-400 flash unit is attached and turned on, Custom
Setting e2 changes to Optional flash, allowing the flash control mode
for the SB-400 to be selected from TTL and Manual (Repeating flash
and Commander mode options are not available).
L
185
A
Flash Control Mode
The shooting information display shows the flash control mode for the built-in flash (Built-in)
and for optional flash units attached to the camera accessory shoe (Optional) as follows:
i-TTL
Built-in
Optional
TTL 2
Manual
Built-in
Optional
—
Auto FP (pg. 195)
—
Repeating flash 2
—
Commander mode 2
Auto aperture (AA) 1
Built-in
Optional
—
—
—
—
—
—
1 Available with SB-900 and SB-800 only.
2 Flash control mode for built-in flash can be selected using Custom Setting e2 (Flash Cntrl
for Built-in Flash, pg. 185).
A
See Also
See Custom Setting e5 (Auto FP, pg. 195) for information on flash sync speeds as fast as 1/320 s.
L
186
❚❚ Manual
Choose a flash level between Full and 1/128 (1/128 of full power). At full power, the
built-in flash has a Guide Number of 18/59 (m/ft., ISO 200, 20°C/68°F).
❚❚ Repeating Flash
The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter is open, producing a
strobe-light effect. Press 4 or 2 to highlight the following
options, 1 or 3 to change.
Option
Output
Description
Choose flash output (expressed as a fraction of full power).
Choose the number of times the flash fires at the selected output. Note that
Times
depending on shutter speed and the option selected for Frequency, the actual
number of flashes may be less than selected.
Frequency Choose how often the flash fires per second.
A
“Times”
The options available for Times are determined by flash
output.
Output Options available for Times
1/4
2
1/8
2–5
1/16
2–10
1/32
2–10, 15
1/64
2–10, 15, 20, 25
1/128 2–10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35
L
187
❚❚ Commander Mode
Use the built-in flash as a master flash controlling one or more remote optional
SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, or SB-R200 flash units in up to two groups (A and B) using
advanced wireless lighting.
Selecting this option displays the menu shown at right. Press 4
or 2 to highlight the following options, 1 or 3 to change.
L
Option
Description
Built-in
Choose a flash mode for the built-in flash (commander flash).
flash
i-TTL mode. Choose flash compensation from values between +3.0 and –3.0 EV in
TTL
increments of 1/3 EV.
M
Choose the flash level from values between Full and 1/128 (1/128 of full power).
The built-in flash does not fire, but the AF-assist illuminator lights. The built-in flash
––
must be raised so that it can emit monitor pre-flashes.
Group A Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group A.
i-TTL mode. Choose flash compensation from values between +3.0 and –3.0 EV in
TTL
increments of 1/3 EV.
Auto aperture (available only with SB-900 and SB-800 flash units). Choose flash
AA
compensation from values between +3.0 and –3.0 EV in increments of 1/3 EV.
M
Choose the flash level from values between Full and 1/128 (1/128 of full power).
– – The flash units in this group do not fire.
Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group B. The options available are the
Group B
same as those listed for Group A, above.
Choose from channels 1–4. All flash units in both groups must be set to the same
Channel
channel.
Follow the steps below to take photographs in commander mode.
1
Adjust settings for the built-in flash.
Choose the flash control mode and output level for the
built-in flash. Note that output level can not be adjusted in
– – mode.
188
2
Adjust settings for group A.
Choose the flash control mode and output level for the
flash units in group A.
3
Adjust settings for group B.
Choose the flash control mode and output level for the
flash units in group B.
4
Select the channel.
5
Press J.
6
Compose the shot.
Compose the shot and arrange the flash units as shown below. Note that the
maximum distance at which the remote flash units can be placed may vary with
shooting conditions.
60 ° or less
10 m/33 ft.
or less
30 ° or less
30 ° or less
5 m/15 ft. or less
Wireless remote
sensors on flash units
should face camera.
L
Camera
(built-in flash)
5 m/15 ft. or less
60 ° or less
7
Set the remote flash units to the selected channel.
Turn all the remote flash units on and set them to the channel selected in
Step 4. See the Speedlight instruction manuals for details.
189
8
Raise the built-in flash.
Press the M button to raise the built-in flash. Note that even if – – is selected for
Built-in flash>Mode, the built-in flash must be raised so that monitor
preflashes will be emitted.
9
Frame the photograph, focus, and shoot.
After confirming that the camera flash-ready light and the flash-ready lights for
all other flash units are lit, frame the photograph, focus, and shoot. FV lock (pg.
198) can be used if desired.
D
Commander Mode
Position the sensor windows on the remote flash units to pick up the monitor preflashes from
the built-in flash (particular care is required when not using a tripod). Be sure that direct light
or strong reflections from the remote flash units do not enter the camera lens (in TTL mode) or
the photocells on the remote flash units (AA mode), as this may interfere with exposure. To
prevent timing flashes emitted by the built-in flash from appearing in photographs taken at
short range, choose low ISO sensitivities or small apertures (large f-numbers) or use an
optional SG-3IR infrared panel for the built-in flash. An SG-3IR is required for best results with
rear-curtain sync, which produces brighter timing flashes. After positioning the remote flash
units, take a test shot and view the results in the camera monitor.
Although there is no limit on the number of remote flash units that may be used, the practical
maximum is three. With more than this number, the light emitted by the remote flash units will
interfere with performance.
A
The Flash Mode Display
M does not appear in the control panel flash mode display when – – is selected for Built-in
flash > Mode.
L A Flash Compensation
The flash compensation value selected with the Y (M) button and sub-command dial is added
to the flash compensation values selected for the built-in flash, group A, and group B in the
Commander mode menu. A Y icon is displayed in the control panel and viewfinder when a
flash compensation value other than ±0 is selected for Built-in flash > TTL. The Y icon
flashes when M is selected for Built-in flash.
190
e3: Modeling Flash
If On is selected when the camera is being used with the built-in flash or an optional
SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, or SB-R200 flash unit, a modeling flash will be emitted when
the camera depth-of-field preview button is pressed (pg. 82). The default setting is
Off. This option is available in P, S, A, and M modes only.
e4: Auto Bracketing Set
Choose the setting or settings bracketed when auto bracketing is in effect (P, S, A, and
M modes only). Choose AE & flash (j; the default setting) to perform both exposure
and flash-level bracketing (pg. 92), AE only (k) to bracket only exposure, Flash only
(l) to perform only flash-level bracketing, WB bracketing (m) to perform whitebalance bracketing (see below), or ADL bracketing to take one picture with Active
D-Lighting on and another with Active D-Lighting off (pg. 193).
❚❚ White Balance Bracketing
1
Select white balance bracketing.
Choose WB bracketing for Custom Setting e4 (Auto
bracketing set). Note that white balance bracketing is not
available at image quality settings of NEF (RAW) or
NEF (RAW) + JPEG.
2
Choose the number of shots.
Pressing the D button, rotate the main command dial to choose the number of
shots in the bracketing sequence. The number of shots is shown in the control
panel.
L
Number of shots
D button
Main command dial
Control panel
Bracketing
progress
indicator
Viewfinder
At settings other than zero, a W icon and bracketing progress indicator
appear in the control panel.
191
3
Select a white balance increment.
Pressing the D button, rotate the sub-command dial to choose the white
balance adjustment. Each increment is roughly equivalent to 5 mired.
White balance
increment
D button
Sub-command dial
Control panel
Choose from increments of 1 (5 mired), 2 (10 mired), or 3 (15 mired; for a
definition of mired, see page 98). Higher B values correspond to increased
amounts of blue, higher A values to increased amounts of amber (pg. 97). The
bracketing programs with an increment of 1 are listed below.
Control panel display
4
L
No. of shots
0
2
2
3
White balance increment
1
1B
1A
1 A, 1 B
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
Each shot will be processed to create the number of copies
specified in the bracketing program, and each copy will
have a different white balance. Modifications to white balance are added to the
white balance adjustment made with white balance fine-tuning.
If the number of shots in the bracketing program is
greater than the number of exposures remaining, the
exposure count displays in the control panel and
viewfinder will flash and the shutter release will be
disabled. Shooting can begin when a new memory
card is inserted.
192
Bracketing order (EVs)
0
0/1B
0/1A
0/1A/1B
❚❚ Canceling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, press the D button and rotate the main command dial until the
number of shots in the bracketing sequence is zero (r) and W is no longer
displayed in the control panel. The program last in effect will be restored the next
time bracketing is activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a twobutton reset (pg. 75), although in this case the bracketing program will not be
restored the next time bracketing is activated.
A
White Balance Bracketing
White balance bracketing affects only color temperature (the amber-blue axis in the white
balance fine-tuning display, pg. 97). No adjustments are made on the green-magenta axis.
If the camera is turned off while the memory card access lamp is lit, the camera will power off
only after all photographs in the sequence have been recorded.
❚❚ ADL Bracketing
1
Select ADL bracketing.
Choose ADL bracketing for Custom Setting e4 (Auto
bracketing set).
2
Enable bracketing.
Pressing the D button, rotate the main command dial until the bracketing
progress indicator is displayed in the control panel.
.
Control panel
D button
Bracketing
progress
indicator
L
Main command dial
Viewfinder
193
3
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
The camera will vary Active D-Lighting with each shot.
The first shot will be taken with Active D-Lighting off, the
following shot at the value currently selected for Active
D-Lighting in the shooting menu (pg. 165).
While bracketing is in effect, a bracketing progress
indicator will be displayed in the control panel. The y
segment will disappear from the indicator when the
unmodified shot is taken, the z indicator when the shot
with Active D-Lighting is taken.
❚❚ Canceling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, press the D button and rotate the main command dial until the
bracketing progress indicator is no longer displayed in the control panel.
D
Active D-Lighting
Matrix metering (Z, pg. 87) is recommended. Noise, lines, and distortion may appear in
photographs taken with Active D-Lighting at high ISO sensitivities. The Brightness and
Contrast Picture Control settings (pg. 111) can not be adjusted while active D-Lighting is in
effect. In exposure mode M, an Active D-Lighting setting of Auto is equivalent to Normal.
L
194
e5: Auto FP
Selecting On for this option (available in only P, S, A, and M modes) enables Auto FP
High-Speed Sync with optional flash units that support the Nikon Creative Lighting
System (CLS). Auto FP allows the flash to be used at shutter speeds 1/200 s–1/4000 s.
Choose to enable fill flash when taking portraits under bright light or when taking
photographs at large apertures. Auto FP High-Speed Sync is not available when
using the built-in flash. The default setting is Off.
e6: Bracketing Order
At the default setting of MTR>under>over (H), exposure and flash bracketing are
performed in the order described on pages 92 and 264, white balance bracketing in
the order no modification, A, B (pg. 191). If Under>MTR>over (I) is selected,
exposure and flash bracketing will proceed in order from the lowest to the highest
value, white balance bracketing in the order A, no modification, B. This option is
available in P, S, A, and M modes only.
L
195
f: Controls
f1: D Switch
Choose the function performed by rotating the power switch to the D position. This
option is available in all shooting modes.
Option
Description
f LCD backlight (D) (default) Control panel backlight illuminates for 6 s.
Control panel backlight illuminates and shooting
g Both
information is displayed in monitor.
f2: OK Button (Shooting Mode)
This option (available in all shooting modes) determines what operations can be
performed by pressing the J button in shooting mode.
Option
Select center focus point
(default)
Highlight active focus
point
Not used
L
196
Description
Pressing the J button in shooting mode selects the center focus
point.
Pressing the J button in shooting mode highlights the active
focus point.
Pressing the J button has no effect when the camera is in
shooting mode.
f3: Assign FUNC. Button
Choose the role played by the Fn button. This option is
available in all shooting modes.
Option
# Framing grid
$ AF-area mode
%
Center focus
point
r
FV lock
(default)
s Flash off
Matrix
metering
CenterM weighted
metering
N Spot metering
Access top item
O
in MY MENU
L
& +NEF (RAW)
Description
Press the Fn button and rotate the main command dial to turn the grid
display in the viewfinder on or off (pg. 9).
Press the Fn button and rotate the main command dial to select the AFarea mode (pg. 173).
Press the Fn button and rotate the main command dial to choose
between normal and wide center focus points (pg. 174).
Press the Fn button to lock flash value (built-in flash and SB-900, SB-800,
SB-600, SB-400, and SB-R200 flash units only, see below). Press again to
cancel FV lock.
The built-in flash and optional flash units turn off while the Fn button is
pressed.
Matrix metering is activated while the Fn button is pressed.
Center-weighted metering is activated while the Fn button is pressed.
Spot metering is activated while the Fn button is pressed.
Press the Fn button to jump to the top item in “MY MENU.” Select this
option for quick access to a frequently-used menu item.
If image quality is set to JPEG fine, JPEG normal, or JPEG basic, “RAW”
will be displayed in the control panel and an NEF (RAW) copy will be
recorded with the next picture taken after the Fn button is pressed. To
exit without recording an NEF (RAW) copy, press the Fn button again or
turn the camera off.
L
197
❚❚ FV Lock
This feature is used to lock flash output, preventing the flash level from changing
between shots or while recomposing photographs. Flash output is adjusted
automatically for any changes in ISO sensitivity or aperture.
1
Assign FV lock to the Fn button.
Both the Fn and the AE-L/AF-L button can be used for FV
lock. To use the Fn button as described below, select FV
lock for Custom Setting f3 (Assign FUNC. button). To use
the AE-L/AF-L button, choose FV lock for Custom Setting f4
(Assign AE-L/AF-L button, pg. 200).
2
Raise the flash.
In i, k, n, and o modes, the flash will pop up
automatically as required when the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway. In P, S, A, and M modes, press
the M button to raise the flash.
M button
3
Focus.
Position the subject in the center of the frame
and press the shutter-release button halfway to
focus.
L
4
Lock flash level.
After confirming that the flash-ready indicator (M) is
displayed in the viewfinder, press the Fn button. The flash
will emit a monitor preflash to determine the appropriate
flash level. Flash output will be locked at this level and a
FV lock icon (r) will appear in the viewfinder.
5
198
Recompose the photograph.
Fn button
6
Take the photograph.
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to shoot. If desired,
additional pictures can be taken without releasing FV lock.
7
Release FV lock.
Press the Fn button to release FV lock and confirm that the r icon is no longer
displayed in viewfinder.
D
Using FV Lock with the Built-in Flash
When the built-in flash is used alone, FV lock is only available if TTL (the default setting) is
selected for Custom Setting e2 (Flash cntrl for built-in flash; pg. 185).
A
Using FV Lock with Optional Flash Units
In addition to the built-in flash, FV lock is available with SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, SB-400 and
SB-R200 flash units (available separately). Set the optional flash to TTL mode (the SB-900 and
SB-800 can also be used in AA mode; see the flash manual for details). While FV lock is in effect,
flash output will automatically be adjusted for changes in flash zoom head position.
When Commander mode is selected for Custom Setting e2 (Flash cntrl for built-in flash,
pg. 185), FV lock can be used with remote SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, or SB-R200 flash units if (a)
any of the built-in flash, flash group A, or flash group B is in TTL mode, or (b) a flash group is
composed entirely of SB-900 and SB-800 flash units in TTL or AA mode.
L
199
f4: Assign AE-L/AF-L Button
Choose the role played by the AE-L/AF-L button. This option is
available in all shooting modes.
.
Option
AE/AF lock
B
(default)
C AE lock only
F AF lock only
Description
Focus and exposure lock while the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.
Exposure locks while the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.
Focus locks while the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.
Exposure locks when the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed, and remains locked
E AE lock (hold) until the button is pressed a second time or the exposure meters turn
off.
The AE-L/AF-L button initiates autofocus. The shutter-release button can
A AF-ON
not be used to focus.
Press the AE-L/AF-L button to lock flash value (built-in flash and SB-900,
r FV lock
SB-800, SB-600, SB-400, and SB-R200 flash units only, pg. 198). Press
again to cancel FV lock.
L
200
f5: Customize Command Dials
This option (available in all shooting modes) controls the operation of the main and
sub-command dials.
Option
Reverse
rotation
Change
main/sub
Menus
and
playback
Description
Controls the direction of the command dials. Choose No (the default option) for
normal command dial operation, or Yes to reverse the rotation of the command
dials. This setting also applies to the command dials for the MB-D80.
At the default setting of Off, the main command dial controls shutter speed and
the sub-command dial controls aperture. If On is selected, the main command
dial will control aperture and the sub-command dial shutter speed. This setting
also applies to the command dials for the MB-D80.
At the default setting of On, the main command dial can be used to choose the
picture displayed during full-frame playback, move the cursor left or right during
thumbnail playback, and move the menu highlight bar up or down. The subcommand dial is used to display additional photo information in full-frame
playback and to move the cursor up or down during thumbnail playback. While
menus are displayed, rotating the sub-command dial right displays the sub-menu
for the selected option, while rotating it left displays the previous menu. To make
a selection, press 2 or J. On (image review excluded) is the same as On except
that the command dials can not be used during image review. If Off is selected,
the multi selector is used to choose the picture displayed during full-frame
playback, highlight thumbnails, and navigate menus.
f6: No Memory Card?
If Release locked (the default setting) is selected, the shutter-release button is only
enabled when a memory card is inserted in the camera. Selecting Enable release
allows the shutter to be released when no memory card is inserted, although no
pictures will be recorded (they will however be displayed in the monitor in demo
mode). Note that when photographs are being captured to a computer using
Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately), photographs are not recorded to the
camera memory card and the shutter will be enabled regardless of the setting
chosen for this option. This option is available in all shooting modes.
L
f7: Reverse Indicators
At the default setting of
(V), the exposure indicators in the viewfinder
and shooting information display are displayed with positive values on the left and
(W) to display negative values on
negative values on the right. Select
the left and positive values on the right. This option is available in all shooting
modes.
201
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
The setup menu contains the options listed below. To display the setup menu, press
G and press 4 to highlight the tab for current menu, then press 1 or 3 to
highlight the setup menu tab; for more information, see page 19.
Option
See page
Option
See page
Format memory card
202
Image comment
205
LCD brightness
202
Auto image rotation
205
Clean image sensor
244
Image dust off ref photo
206
Lock mirror up for cleaning 1
246
Battery info
208
Video mode
203
GPS
208
HDMI
203
Eye-Fi upload 2
208
World time
204
Firmware version
208
Language
204
2 Only available when compatible Eye-Fi
memory card is inserted (pg 208).
1 Not available when battery is low.
Format Memory Card
Format the card. Note that formatting permanently deletes all pictures and other data
on the card. Before formatting, be sure to make backup copies as required.
D
During Formatting
Do not turn the camera off or remove memory cards during formatting.
A
Two-Button Format
Memory cards can also be formatted by pressing the Q (O and Z) buttons for about two
seconds (pg. 75).
LCD Brightness
g
202
Press 1 or 3 to choose from seven settings for monitor
brightness. Choose higher values for increased brightness,
lower values for reduced brightness.
Clean Image Sensor
Select this option to remove dust from the image sensor or to choose options for
automatic image sensor cleaning (pg. 244).
Lock Mirror up for Cleaning
Lock the mirror in the up position to allow inspection or manual cleaning of the lowpass filter that protects the camera image sensor (pg. 246).
Video Mode
When connecting the camera to a television or VCR via the video connector, be sure
the camera video mode matches the device video standard (NTSC or PAL).
HDMI
The camera is equipped with an HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
connector, allowing pictures to be played back on high-definition televisions or
monitors using a type C cable (available separately from commercial suppliers).
Before connecting the camera to high-definition device, choose the HDMI format
from the options below.
v
J
K
L
M
Option
Auto (default)
480p (progressive)
576p (progressive)
720p (progressive)
1080i (interlaced)
Description
The camera automatically selects the appropriate format.
640 × 480 (progressive) format
720 × 576 (progressive) format
1,280 × 720 (progressive) format
1,920 × 1,080 (interlaced) format
The camera monitor turns off automatically when an HDMI device is connected.
g
203
World Time
Change time zones, set the camera clock, choose the date display order, and turn
daylight saving time on or off.
Option
Description
Choose a time zone. The camera clock is automatically set to the time in the
Time zone
new time zone.
Date and time Set the camera clock (pg. 27).
Date format Choose the order in which the day, month, and year are displayed.
Daylight
Turn daylight saving time on or off. The camera clock will automatically be
saving time advanced or set back one hour. The default setting is Off.
A
The Clock Battery
The camera clock is powered by an independent, rechargeable power source, which is charged
as necessary when the main battery is installed or the camera is powered by an optional EH-5a
or EH-5 AC adapter (pg. 239). Two days of charging will power the clock for about three
months. If the B icon flashes in the control panel, the clock battery is exhausted and the
clock has been reset. Set the clock to the correct time and date.
Language
Choose a language for camera menus and messages. The following options are
available.
Option
g
204
Description
Danish
German
English
Spanish
Finnish
French
Italian
Dutch
Norwegian
Polish
Option
Description
Portuguese
Russian
Swedish
Traditional Chinese
Simplified Chinese
Japanese
Korean
Image Comment
Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken. Comments can be viewed in
ViewNX (supplied) or Capture NX 2 (available separately; pg. 240). The comment is
also visible on the third page of the photo information display (pg. 132).
• Done: Save changes and return to the setup menu.
• Input comment: Input a comment as described on page 169. Comments can be up to
36 characters long.
• Attach comment: Select this option to attach the comment to all
subsequent photographs. Attach comment can be turned
on and off by highlighting it and pressing 2.
Auto Image Rotation
Photographs taken while On (the default option) is selected contain information on
camera orientation, allowing them to be rotated automatically during playback (pg.
128) or when viewed in ViewNX or Capture NX 2 (available separately; pg. 240). The
following orientations are recorded:
Landscape (wide) orientation
Camera rotated 90° clockwise
Camera rotated 90°
counterclockwise
Camera orientation is not recorded when Off is selected. Choose this option when
taking photographs with the lens pointing up or down.
D
Auto Image Rotation
In ! and 9 release modes (pg. 65), the orientation recorded for the first shot applies to all
photographs in the same burst, even if camera orientation is changed during shooting.
g
A
Rotate Tall
To automatically rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) photographs for display during playback,
select On for the Rotate tall option in the playback menu (pg. 160). Note that because the
camera itself is already in the appropriate orientation during shooting, images are not rotated
automatically during image review (pg. 128).
205
Image Dust off Ref Photo
Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in Capture NX 2 (available
separately; for more information, see the Capture NX 2 manual).
Image dust off ref photo is available only when a CPU lens is mounted on the
camera. A lens with a focal length of at least 50 mm is recommended. When using a
zoom lens, zoom all the way in.
1
Choose a start option.
Highlight one of the following options and
press J. To exit without acquiring image dust
off data, press G.
• Start: The message shown at right will be
displayed and “rEF” will appear in the
viewfinder and control panel displays.
• Clean sensor and then start: Select this option to
clean the image sensor before starting. The
message shown at right will be displayed and
“rEF” will appear in the viewfinder and control
panel displays when cleaning is complete.
DImage Sensor Cleaning
Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed can not be
used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is performed. Select Clean
sensor and then start only if the dust off reference data will not be used with existing
photographs.
g
2
Frame a featureless white object in the viewfinder.
With the lens about ten centimeters (four inches) from a well-lit, featureless
white object, frame the object so that it fills the viewfinder and then press the
shutter-release button halfway.
In autofocus mode, focus will automatically be set to infinity; in manual focus
mode, set focus to infinity manually.
206
3
Acquire dust off reference data.
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to acquire Image Dust
Off reference data. The monitor turns off when the shutter-release button is
pressed. Note that noise reduction will be performed if the subject is poorly lit,
increasing recording times.
If the reference object is too bright or too dark, the camera
may be unable to acquire Image Dust Off reference data
and the message shown at right will be displayed. Choose
another reference object and repeat the process from
step 1.
D
Image Dust Off Reference Data
The same reference data can be used for photographs taken with
different lenses or at different apertures. Reference images can not be
viewed using computer imaging software. A grid pattern is displayed
when reference images are viewed on the camera; histograms and
highlights are not displayed.
g
207
Battery Info
View information on the battery currently inserted in the
camera (if the camera is powered by an optional MB-D80
battery pack containing two EN-EL3e batteries, information for
each battery will be listed separately; only the battery level is
displayed when AA batteries are used).
Item
Description
Bat. meter The current battery level expressed as a percentage.
The number of times the shutter has been released with the current battery since
the battery was last charged. Note that the camera may sometimes release the
Pic. meter
shutter without recording a photograph, for example when measuring preset
white balance.
A five-level display showing battery age. 0 (k) indicates that battery
performance is unimpaired, 4 (l) that the battery has reached the end of its
Battery charging life and should be replaced. Note that batteries charged at
temperatures under about 5 °C (41 °F) may show a temporary drop in charging
age
life; the charging life display will however return to normal once the battery has
been recharged at a temperature of about 20 °C (68 °F) or higher.
GPS
Adjust settings for connection to a GPS unit (pg. 124).
Eye-Fi Upload
g
This option is displayed only when one of the following 2GB Eye-Fi memory cards
(available separately from third-party suppliers) is inserted in the camera: Eye-Fi Card,
Eye-Fi Home, Eye-Fi Share, and Eye-Fi Explore (at the time of writing, Eye-Fi memory
cards were approved for use in the United States of America only; be sure that Eye-Fi
card firmware has been updated to the latest version). Choose Enable to upload
JPEG images taken with the camera to a preselected destination.
Note that pictures will not be uploaded if signal strength is insufficient. Choose
Disable where wireless devices are prohibited.
Firmware Version
View the current camera firmware version.
208
N The Retouch Menu:
Creating Retouched Copies
The options in the retouch menu are used to create trimmed or retouched copies of
the photographs on the memory card. The retouch menu is only available when a
memory card containing photographs is inserted in the camera. To display the
retouch menu, press G and press 4 to highlight the tab for current menu, then
press 1 or 3 to highlight the retouch menu tab; for more information, see page 19.
Option
See page
Option
See page
212
o Image overlay
218
i D-Lighting *
j Red-eye correction *
212
% NEF (RAW) processing
220
221
k Trim
213
& Quick retouch *
l Monochrome *
214
' Straighten
221
215
( Distortion control
222
m Filter effects *
n Color balance *
216
) Fisheye
222
0 Small picture
216
p Side-by-side comparison
223
* Not available with photographs taken with Monochrome selected for Set Picture Control
or JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) images created with Monochrome selected for Set Picture
Control (cross screen filter effects can be applied to monochrome images).
u
209
Creating Retouched Copies
Except in the case of Image overlay (pg. 218) and Side-by-side comparison
(pg. 223), the photographs to be retouched can be selected in full-frame playback as
well as from the retouch menu.
❚❚ Creating Retouched Copies in Full-Frame Playback
1
Choose a picture.
Display the desired picture in full-frame
playback (pg. 128).
2
Display the retouch menu.
Press J to display the retouch menu.
3
Select retouch options.
Highlight the desired item in the retouch menu
and press 2 to display retouch options (for
more information, see the section for the
selected item on the following pages). To return
to full-frame playback without creating a retouched copy, press K.
4
Create a retouched copy.
Press J to create a retouched copy. Retouched
copies are indicated by a N icon.
u A Retouch
The D90 may not be able to display or create retouched copies of images created with other
devices.
The monitor will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for the length of time
selected for Custom Setting c4 (Monitor off delay) > Menus. The default is 20 s.
210
❚❚ Creating Retouched Copies from the Retouch Menu
1
Select an item in the retouch menu.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an item, 2 to select.
Depending on the option selected, a menu may
be displayed; highlight an option and press 2.
2
Select a picture.
The pictures on the memory card will be
displayed. Use the multi selector to highlight a
picture (to view the highlighted picture full
screen, press and hold the X button).
3
Display retouch options.
Press J to display retouch options (see the
section for the selected option for details). To
exit without creating a retouched copy, press
G.
4
Create a retouched copy.
Press J to create a retouched copy. Retouched
copies are indicated by a N icon.
A
Retouching Copies
Copies created with Trim or Small picture can not be further modified. Quick retouch is not
available with copies created with D-lighting; similarly, D-lighting is not available with copies
created with Quick retouch. D-lighting, red-eye correction, filter effects (cross screen
excepted), quick retouch, and color balance can not be applied to monochrome copies. With
the exception of Cross screen, filter effects can not be applied to copies created with filters
other than Cross screen. Image overlay can be applied multiple times. Otherwise the
options in the retouch menu can each be applied once to existing copies, although multiple
edits may result in loss of detail.
u
A
Image Quality
Except in the case of copies created with Trim (pg. 213), Small picture (pg. 216), and Image
overlay (pg. 218), copies created from JPEG images are the same size and quality as the
original, while copies created from NEF (RAW) photos are saved as large fine-quality JPEG
images.
211
D-Lighting
D-lighting brightens shadows, making it ideal for dark or backlit photographs.
Before
After
Press 1 or 3 to choose the amount of correction performed.
The effect can be previewed in the edit display. Press J to copy
the photograph.
Red-Eye Correction
This option is used to correct “red-eye” caused by the flash, and
is available only with photographs taken using the flash. The
photograph selected for red-eye correction is previewed as
shown at right. Confirm the effects of red-eye correction and
create a copy as described in the following table. Note that
red-eye correction may not always produce the expected results
and may in very rare circumstances be applied to portions of the image that are not
affected by red-eye; check the preview thoroughly before proceeding.
u
212
To
Use
Zoom in
X
Zoom out
W
View other
areas of image
Cancel zoom
J
Create copy
J
Description
Press X button to zoom in, W button to
zoom out. While photo is zoomed in, use
multi selector to view areas of image not
visible in monitor. Keep multi selector
pressed to scroll rapidly to other areas of
frame. Navigation window is displayed
when zoom buttons or multi selector is
pressed; area currently visible in monitor is
indicated by yellow border. Press J to
cancel zoom.
If the camera detects red-eye in the selected photograph, a copy
will be created that has been processed to reduce its effects. No
copy will be created if the camera is unable to detect red-eye.
Trim
Create a cropped copy of the selected photograph. The
selected photograph is displayed with the selected crop shown
in yellow; create a cropped copy as described in the following
table.
To
Increase size of crop
Reduce size of crop
Use
X
W
Description
Press the X button to increase the size of the crop.
Press the W button to reduce the size of the crop.
Change crop aspect
ratio
Rotate the main command dial to switch between aspect
ratios of 3 : 2, 4 : 3, and 5 : 4.
Move crop
Use multi selector to move the crop to another area of the
image.
Preview crop
Create copy
Press center of multi selector to preview cropped image.
J
Save the current crop as a separate file.
D
Trim: Image Quality and Size
Copies created from NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW) + JPEG photos have an image quality of JPEG fine
(pg. 62); copies created from JPEG photos have the same image quality as the original. The size
of the copy varies with crop size and aspect ratio.
Aspect ratio
Possible sizes
3:2
3,424 × 2,280, 2,560 × 1,704, 1,920 × 1,280, 1,280 × 856, 960 × 640, 640 × 424
4:3
3,424 × 2,568, 2,560 × 1,920, 1,920 × 1,440, 1,280 × 960, 960 × 720, 640 × 480
5:4
3,216 × 2,568, 2,400 × 1,920, 1,808 × 1,440, 1,200 × 960, 896 × 720, 608 × 480
u
213
Monochrome
Copy photographs in Black-and-white, Sepia, or Cyanotype
(blue and white monochrome).
Selecting Sepia or Cyanotype displays a preview of
the selected image; press 1 to increase color
saturation, 3 to decrease. Press J to create a
monochrome copy.
Increase
saturation
Decrease
saturation
u
214
Filter Effects
Choose from the following color filter effects. After adjusting filter effects as
described below, press J to copy the photograph.
Option
Description
Creates the effect of a skylight filter, making the picture less
Skylight blue. The effect can be previewed in the monitor as shown
at right.
Warm
filter
Creates a copy with warm tone filter effects, giving the copy
a “warm” red cast. The effect can be previewed in the
monitor.
Red
intensifier
Green Intensify reds (Red intensifier), greens (Green intensifier),
intensifier or blues (Blue intensifier). Use the multi selector to choose
from three intensity levels: 1 (high), 2 (medium), or 3 (low).
Blue
intensifier
Add starburst effects to light sources.
• Number of points: Choose from four, six, or eight.
• Filter amount: Choose the brightness of the light sources
affected.
Cross
• Filter angle: Choose the angle of the points.
screen
• Length of points: Choose the length of points.
• Confirm: Preview the effects of the filter as shown at right.
Press X to preview the copy full frame.
• Save: Create a retouched copy.
u
215
Color Balance
Use the multi selector to create a copy with modified color
balance as shown below. The effect is displayed in the monitor
together with red, green, and blue histograms (pg. 130) giving
the distribution of tones in the copy.
Increase amount of green
Create retouched copy
Increase amount of blue
Increase amount of amber
Increase amount of magenta
A
Zoom
To zoom in on the image displayed in the monitor, press the X button.
The histogram will be updated to show data only for the portion of the
image displayed in the monitor. While the image is zoomed in, press the
L button to toggle playback zoom and zoom and scroll the image as
described on page 138.
Small Picture
Create a small copy of the selected picture. The following sizes are available:
Option
640×480
320×240
160×120
u
Description
Suited to television playback.
Suited to display on Web pages.
Suitable for e-mail.
The small picture option can be used during full-frame playback as described on
page 210. The procedure for selecting pictures after choosing Small picture from
the retouch menu, however, differs from that described at the beginning of this
section: instead of selecting a single photograph and then choosing a picture size,
the user selects a picture size first and then selects one or more photographs to copy
at the selected size as described below.
Selecting Small picture from the retouch menu displays the menu shown in Step 1.
Follow the steps below to create small copies of multiple pictures.
1
Select Choose size.
Highlight Choose size and press 2.
216
2
Choose the desired size.
Highlight desired size and press J to select and
return to the previous menu.
3
Choose Select image.
Highlight Select image and press 2.
4
Select pictures.
W button
Highlight pictures using the multi
selector and press the W button to
select or deselect (pg. 160). Selected
pictures are marked by an icon.
5
Press J to complete the operation.
Press J. A confirmation dialog will be
displayed; highlight Yes and press J to copy
pictures at the selected size and return to
playback. To exit without creating copies,
highlight No and press J, or press G to exit to
the retouch menu.
A
Viewing Small Pictures
Small pictures are indicated by a gray border during full-frame playback. Playback zoom is not
available when small pictures are displayed.
u
217
Image Overlay
Image overlay combines two existing NEF (RAW) photographs to create a single
picture that is saved separately from the originals; the results, which make use of RAW
data from the camera image sensor, are noticeably better than overlays created in an
imaging application. The new picture is saved at current image quality and size
settings; before creating an overlay, set image quality and size (pp. 62, 63; all options
are available). To create an NEF (RAW) copy, choose an image quality of NEF (RAW).
1
Select Image overlay.
Highlight Image overlay in the retouch menu
and press 2. The dialog shown at right will be
displayed, with Image 1 highlighted.
2
Display NEF (RAW) images.
Press J to display a picture selection dialog
listing only NEF (RAW) images created with this
camera (note that hidden images are not
displayed and can not be selected).
3
Highlight a photograph.
Use the multi selector to highlight the first
photograph in the overlay. To view the
highlighted photograph full frame, press and
hold the X button.
4
Select the highlighted photograph.
Press J to select the highlighted photograph
and return to the preview display. The selected
image will appear as Image 1.
u
5
Set gain.
Optimize exposure for the overlay by pressing
1 or 3 to select the gain for image 1 from
values between 0.1 and 2.0. The default value is
1.0; selecting 0.5 cuts gain in half, while
selecting 2.0 doubles gain. The effects of gain are visible in the Preview
column.
218
6
Select the second photograph.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight Image 2. Repeat
Steps 2–5 to select the second photo and adjust
gain.
7
Highlight the Preview column.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight the Preview column.
8
Preview the overlay.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight Overlay and press J
(to save the overlay without displaying a
preview, highlight Save and press J). To return
to Step 7 and select new photos or adjust gain,
press W.
9
Save the overlay.
Press J while the preview is displayed to save
the overlay. After an overlay is created, the
resulting image will be displayed full-frame in
the monitor.
+
D
Image Overlay
The overlay has the same photo info (including date of recording, metering, shutter speed,
aperture, exposure mode, exposure compensation, focal length, and image orientation) and
values for white balance and Picture Control as the photograph selected for Image 1.
u
219
NEF (RAW) Processing
Create JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) photographs.
1
Select NEF (RAW) processing.
Highlight NEF (RAW) processing in the retouch
menu and press 2 to display a picture selection
dialog listing only NEF (RAW) images created
with this camera (note that hidden images are
not displayed and can not be selected).
2
Select a photograph.
Use the multi selector to highlight a photograph
(to view the highlighted photograph full frame,
press and hold the X button). Press J to select
the highlighted photograph and proceed to the
next step.
3
Adjust NEF (RAW) processing settings.
The following options are available:
Option
Image quality
Image size
u
220
Description
Choose from FINE, NORM, and BASIC (pg. 62)
Choose from L, M, and S (pg. 63).
Choose a white balance setting and adjust fine tuning (pg. 97).
White balance This option is not available with images creating using Image
overlay.
Choose a value for exposure compensation between –3 and +3 in
Exposure comp. increments of 1 (these increments differ from the steps normally
used for exposure compensation).
Set Picture Control Choose a Picture Control (pg. 109).
4
Copy the photograph.
Highlight EXE and press J to create a JPEG copy
of the selected photograph. To exit without
copying the photograph, press the G button.
Quick Retouch
Create copies with enhanced saturation and contrast. D-lighting is applied as
required to brighten dark or backlit subjects.
Press 1 or 3 to choose the amount of enhancement. The effect
can be previewed in the edit display. Press J to copy the
photograph.
Straighten
Create a straightened copy of the selected image. Press 2 to
rotate the image clockwise by up to five degrees in increments
of approximately 0.25 degrees, 4 to rotate it counterclockwise
(note that edges of the image will be trimmed to create a square
copy). Press J to copy the photograph, or press K to exit to
playback without creating a copy.
u
221
Distortion Control
Create copies with reduced peripheral distortion. Select Auto
to let the camera correct distortion automatically and then
make fine adjustments using the multi selector, or select
Manual to reduce distortion manually. Press 2 to reduce barrel
distortion, 4 to reduce pin-cushion distortion (note that greater
amounts of distortion control result in more of the edges being
cropped out). Press J to copy the photograph, or press K to
exit to playback without creating a copy.
D
Auto
Auto is for use only with pictures taken with type G and D lenses (PC, fisheye, and certain other
lenses excluded; for more information, see the websites listed on page xviii). Results are not
guaranteed with other lenses.
Fisheye
Create copies that appear to have been taken with a fisheye
lens. Press 2 to increase the effect (this also increases the
amount of that will be cropped out at the edges of the image),
4 to reduce it. Press J to copy the photograph, or press K to
exit to playback without creating a copy.
u
222
Side-by-Side Comparison
Compare retouched copies to the original photographs.
❚❚ Making a Side-by-Side Comparison
1
Select a picture.
Use the multi selector to select a picture and
press J. Only retouched copies (shown by a N
icon) or photographs that have been retouched
can be selected.
2
Select Side-by-side comparison.
Highlight Side-by-side comparison and press
J.
3
Compare the copy with the original.
Options used to
created copy
The source image is displayed on the left, the
retouched copy on the right, with the options
used to create the copy listed at the top of the
display. Press 1, 3, 4, or 2 as indicated by the
arrow adjacent to the highlighted image to
switch between the source image and the
Source Retouched
retouched copy. To view the highlighted
image
copy
picture full frame, press and hold the X button.
If the copy was created from two images using Image overlay, press 1 or 3 to
view the other source image. If multiple copies exist for the current source
image, press 1 or 3 to view the other copies. To exit to playback mode, press
the K button, or press J to return to playback with the highlighted image
displayed.
D
Side-by-Side Comparison
The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a photograph that has
since been deleted or is currently protected (pg. 139) or hidden (pg. 162).
u
223
m Recent Settings/O My Menu
The camera offers a choice of two custom menus: a recent settings menu consisting of
the twenty most recently used settings, added to the top of the menu in the order
they are used, and My Menu, a customized list of options from the playback, shooting,
Custom Settings, setup, and retouch menus. To display the custom menu, press G
and press 4 to highlight the tab for current menu, then press 1 or 3 to highlight the
custom menu tab; for more information, see page 19.
❚❚ Choose Tab: Choosing a Custom Menu
Both the recent settings menu and My Menu contain a Choose tab option for
choosing the menu displayed. To switch back and forth between the recent settings
menu and My Menu, follow the steps below.
1
Select Choose tab.
In the m RECENT SETTINGS menu or O MY
MENU, highlight Choose tab and press 2.
2
Select the desired menu.
Highlight Recent settings or My Menu and
press J. The selected menu will be displayed.
m Recent Settings: Viewing Recent Settings
The recent settings menu lists the twenty most
recently used settings.
w
224
O My Menu: Creating a Custom Menu
The My Menu option can be used to create and edit a customized list of up to 20
options from the playback, shooting, Custom Settings, setup, and retouch menus.
Options can be added, deleted, and reordered as described below.
❚❚ Adding Options to My Menu
1
Select Add items.
In My Menu, highlight Add items and press 2.
2
Select a menu.
Highlight the name of the menu containing the
option you wish to add and press 2.
3
Select an item.
Highlight the desired menu item and press J.
Items currently in My Menu are indicated by a
checkmark; items indicated by a V icon can not
be selected.
4
Position the new item.
Press 1 or 3 to move the new item up or down
in My Menu. Press J to add the new item.
Repeat steps 1–4 to select additional items.
❚❚ Deleting Options from My Menu
1
Select Remove items.
In My Menu, highlight Remove items and press 2.
2
w
Select items.
Highlight items and press 2 to select or
deselect. Selected items are indicated by a
check mark.
225
3
Select Done.
Highlight Done and press J.
4
Delete the selected items.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed. Press J
to delete the selected items.
A
Deleting Items in My Menu
To delete the item currently highlighted in My Menu, press the O button. A confirmation
dialog will be displayed; press O again to remove the selected item from My Menu.
❚❚ Reordering Options in My Menu
1
Select Rank items.
In My Menu, highlight Rank items and press 2.
2
Select an item.
Highlight the item you wish to move and press
J.
3
Position the item.
Press 1 or 3 to move the item up or down in My
Menu and press J. Repeat Steps 2–3 to
reposition additional items.
w
226
nTechnical Notes
This chapter covers the following topics:
Compatible Lenses ........................................................................................................ 228
Compatible CPU Lenses............................................................................................................ 229
Non-CPU Lenses .......................................................................................................................... 230
Optional Flash Units (Speedlights) ............................................................................ 233
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)......................................................................... 233
Flash Contacts .............................................................................................................................. 238
Other Accessories .......................................................................................................... 239
Caring for the Camera .................................................................................................. 243
Storage............................................................................................................................................ 243
Cleaning ......................................................................................................................................... 243
The Low-Pass Filter ..................................................................................................................... 244
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions .......................................................... 248
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ 250
Error Messages............................................................................................................... 255
Appendix......................................................................................................................... 258
Available Settings and Defaults............................................................................................. 258
Memory Card Capacity ............................................................................................................. 262
Exposure Program ...................................................................................................................... 263
Bracketing Programs.................................................................................................................. 264
Flash Control................................................................................................................................. 265
Shutter Speeds Available with the Built-in Flash............................................................. 265
Aperture, Sensitivity, and Flash Range................................................................................ 266
Specifications ................................................................................................................. 267
n
227
Compatible Lenses
CPU lenses (particularly types G and D) are recommended for use with the D90. CPU
lenses can be identified by the presence of CPU contacts, type G and D lenses by a
letter on the lens barrel. Type G lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture ring.
Aperture ring
CPU contacts
CPU lens
Type G lens
Type D lens
A
Calculating Picture Angle
The size of the area exposed by a 35mm camera is 36 × 24 mm. The size of the area exposed by
the D90, in contrast, is 23.6 × 15.8 mm, meaning that the picture angle of a 35mm camera is
approximately 1.5 times that of the D90. The approximate focal length of lenses for the D90 in
35mm format can be calculated by multiplying the focal length of the lens by about 1.5.
Picture size (35mm format)
(36 × 24 mm)
Lens
Picture diagonal
Picture size (D90)
(23.6 × 15.8 mm)
Picture angle (35mm format)
n
Picture angle (D90)
A
Lens f-number
The f-number given in lens names is the maximum aperture of the lens.
228
Compatible CPU Lenses 1
Camera setting
AF
Focus
M (with electronic
rangefinder)
✔
✔
✔4
✔7
✔8
✔9
M
Mode
i, j, k, l,
m, n, o, P, S, A
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
M
Metering
a
Z
3D Color b
✔ — ✔3
✔ — ✔3
✔ — ✔3
✔ — ✔3
— ✔ ✔3
— ✔ ✔3
Lens/accessory
Type G or D AF Nikkor 2, AF-S, AF-I Nikkor
✔
✔
✔
PC-E NIKKOR series 4
—
✔
✔
PC Micro 85mm f/2.8D 5
—
✔
✔
AF-S / AF-I teleconverter 6
✔7
✔
✔
Other AF Nikkor (except lenses for F3AF)
✔8
✔
✔
AI-P Nikkor
—
✔
✔
1 IX-Nikkor lenses can not be used.
2 Vibration Reduction (VR) supported with VR lenses.
3 Spot metering meters selected focus point.
4 Can not be used with shifting or tilting.
5 The camera’s exposure metering and flash control systems may not function as expected when the
lens is shifted and/or tilted or an aperture other than the maximum aperture is used.
6 AF-S or AF-I lens required (see below).
7 With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
8 When AF 80–200mm f/2.8, AF 35–70mm f/2.8, AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 (New), or AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5
lenses are zoomed all the way in at the minimum focus distance, the in-focus indicator may be
displayed when the image on the matte screen in the viewfinder is not in focus. Focus manually until
image in viewfinder is in focus.
9 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
A
The AF-S/AF-I Teleconverter
The AF-S/AF-I teleconverter can be used with the following AF-S and AF-I lenses:
• AF-S NIKKOR 500mm f/4G ED VR 2
• AF-S VR Micro 105mm f/2.8G ED 1
• AF-S VR 200mm f/2G ED
• AF-S 500mm f/4D ED II 2
• AF-S VR 300mm f/2.8G ED
• AF-S 500mm f/4D ED 2
• AF-S 300mm f/2.8D ED II
• AF-I 500mm f/4D ED 2
• AF-S 300mm f/2.8D ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 600mm f/4G ED VR 2
• AF-I 300mm f/2.8D ED
• AF-S 600mm f/4D ED II 2
2
• AF-S 300mm f/4D ED
• AF-S 600mm f/4D ED 2
• AF-S NIKKOR 400mm f/2.8G ED VR
• AF-I 600mm f/4D ED 2
• AF-S 400mm f/2.8D ED II
• AF-S VR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED
• AF-S 400mm f/2.8D ED
• AF-S 80–200mm f/2.8D ED
• AF-I 400mm f/2.8D ED
• AF-S VR 200–400mm f/4G ED 2
1 Autofocus not supported.
2 Autofocus not supported when used with AF-S Teleconverter TC-17E II/TC-20E II.
n
229
Non-CPU Lenses 1
Non-CPU lenses include manual focus lenses and other lenses without a built-in CPU.
The following is a list of compatible non-CPU lenses and accessories.
Camera setting
AF
Focus
M (with electronic
rangefinder)
✔2
✔
—
✔5
✔6
✔2
M
Mode
Metering
i, j, k, l,
a, Z,
M
m, n, o, P, S, A
b
—
✔3
—
—
✔ 3, 4
—
—
✔3
—
—
✔3
—
—
✔3
—
—
✔3
—
Lens/accessory
AI-, AI-modified, Nikkor or Nikon Series E lenses
—
✔
Medical-Nikkor 120mm f/4
—
✔
Reflex-Nikkor
—
✔
PC-Nikkor
—
✔
AI-type Teleconverter
—
✔
PB-6 Bellows Focusing Attachment 7
—
✔
Auto extension rings (PK-series 11A, 12, or 13;
2
—
✔
✔
—
PN-11)
1 Some lenses can not be used (see below).
2 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
3 Electronic analog exposure display can not be used.
4 Shutter speeds slower than 1/60 s not available.
5 Can not be used with shifting or tilting.
6 With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
7 Attach in vertical orientation (can be used in horizontal orientation once attached).
✔3
—
D
Compatible Non-CPU Lenses
The lenses listed above may only be used when the camera is in mode M. Selecting another
mode disables the shutter release. Aperture must be adjusted manually via the lens aperture
ring and the camera autofocus system, metering, electronic analog exposure display, depthof-field preview, and i-TTL flash control can not be used.
D
n
230
Incompatible Accessories and Non-CPU Lenses
The following accessories and non-CPU lenses can NOT be used with the D90:
• TC-16AS AF teleconverter
• Non-AI lenses
• Lenses that require the AU-1 focusing unit (400mm f/4.5, 600mm f/5.6, 800mm f/8, 1200mm
f/11)
• Fisheye (6mm f/5.6, 7.5mm f/5.6, 8mm f/8, OP 10mm f/5.6)
• 2.1cm f/4
• Extension Ring K2
• 180–600mm f/8 ED (serial numbers 174041–174180)
• 360–1200mm f/11 ED (serial numbers 174031–174127)
• 200–600mm f/9.5 (serial numbers 280001–300490)
• AF lenses for the F3AF (AF 80mm f/2.8, AF 200mm f/3.5 ED, AF Teleconverter TC-16)
• PC 28mm f/4 (serial number 180900 or earlier)
• PC 35mm f/2.8 (serial numbers 851001–906200)
• PC 35mm f/3.5 (old type)
• Reflex 1000mm f/6.3 (old type)
• Reflex 1000mm f/11 (serial numbers 142361–143000)
• Reflex 2000mm f/11 (serial numbers 200111–200310)
D
Red-Eye Reduction
Lenses that block the subject’s view of the AF-assist illuminator may interfere with red-eye
reduction.
D
AF-Assist Illumination
AF-assist illumination is not available with the following lenses:
• AF-S NIKKOR 14–24mm f/2.8G ED
• AF VR 80–400mm f/4.5–5.6D ED
• AF-S VR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED
• AF-S VR 200mm f/2G ED
• AF-S 80–200mm f/2.8D ED
• AF-S VR 200–400mm f/4G ED
• AF 80–200mm f/2.8D ED
At ranges under 1 m (3 ft. 3 in.), the following lenses may block the AF-assist illuminator and
interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor:
• AF 24–85mm f/2.8–4D
• AF-S DX 12–24mm f/4G ED
• AF-S DX NIKKOR 16–85mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
• AF-S VR 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6G ED
• AF-S 17–35mm f/2.8D ED
• AF 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6D
• AF-S DX 17–55mm f/2.8G ED
• AF-S 28–70mm f/2.8D ED
• AF 18–35mm f/3.5–4.5D ED
• AF 28–200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED
• AF-S DX 18–70mm f/3.5–4.5G ED
• AF Micro 70–180mm f/4.5–5.6D ED
• AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
• AF-S VR Micro 105mm f/2.8G ED
• AF-S DX VR 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G
• AF Micro 200mm f/4D ED
• AF 20–35mm f/2.8D
• AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED
• AF-S 24–85mm f/3.5–4.5G ED
n
231
D
The Built-in Flash
The built-in flash can be used with CPU lenses with focal lengths of 18–300 mm. Remove lens
hoods to prevent shadows. The flash has a minimum range of 60 cm (2 ft.) and can not be used
in the macro range of macro zoom lenses. The flash may be unable to light the entire subject
with the following lenses at ranges less than those given below:
Lens
AF-S DX 12–24mm f/4G ED
AF-S DX NIKKOR 16–85mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
AF-S 17–35mm f/2.8D ED
AF-S DX 17–55mm f/2.8G ED
AF 18–35mm f/3.5– 4.5D ED
AF-S DX 18–70mm f/3.5–4.5G ED
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
AF-S DX 18–135mm f/3.5–5.6G ED
AF-S DX VR 18– 200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED
AF 20–35mm f/2.8D
AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED
AF-S VR 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6G ED
PC-E NIKKOR 24mm f/3.5 ED *
AF-S 28–70mm f/2.8D ED
AF-S VR 200–400mm f/4G ED
Zoom position
20 mm
24 mm
18 mm
20 mm
24 mm
28 mm, 35 mm
28 mm
35 mm
24 mm
18 mm
20 mm
24 mm
18 mm
24 mm, 35 mm
20 mm
24 mm
35 mm
24 mm
24 mm
35 mm
50 mm
200 mm
250 mm, 300 mm
Min. range
2.0 m/6 ft. 7 in.
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.
2.0 m/6 ft. 7 in.
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.
2.0 m/6 ft. 7 in.
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.
1.5 m/4 ft. 11 in.
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.
2.5 m/8 ft. 2in.
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.
1.5 m/4 ft. 11 in.
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.
1.5 m/4 ft. 11 in.
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.
1.5 m/4 ft. 11 in.
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.
2.0 m/6 ft. 7 in.
1.5 m/4 ft. 11 in.
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.
3.0 m/9 ft. 10 in.
2.5 m/8 ft. 2in.
* Can not be used with shifting or tilting.
When used with the AF-S NIKKOR 14–24 mm f/2.8G ED, the flash will be unable to light the
entire subject at all ranges.
With the exceptions of the AI-S ED 200mm f/2 and AI ED 200mm f/2, the built-in flash can also
be used with AI- and AI-modified Nikkor and Nikon Series E non-CPU lenses with focal lengths
of 18–200 mm. At the 35 mm zoom position, AI-S 25–50mm f/4, AI 25–50mm f/4, and AI-S 35–
70mm lenses must be used at ranges of 1.0 m/3ft. 3 in. or more. AI 50–300mm f/4.5, AImodified 50–300mm f/4.5, AI-S 50–300mm f/4.5 ED, and AI-modified 85–250mm f/4 lenses
must be used at zoom positions of 135 mm or above, AI 50–300 f/4.5 ED lenses at 105 mm or
above.
n
232
Optional Flash Units (Speedlights)
The D90 can be used with CLS-compatible flash units. Remove the
accessory shoe cover when attaching optional flash units. The builtin flash will not fire when an optional flash unit is attached.
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)
Nikon’s advanced Creative Lighting System (CLS) offers improved communication
between the camera and compatible flash units for improved flash photography.
The Creative Lighting System supports the following features:
• i-TTL flash control: Improved through-the-lens (TTL) flash control for use with CLS
(see page 265). Flash level is set using monitor pre-flashes to measure the light
reflected by the subject, ensuring optimal flash output.
• Advanced Wireless Lighting: Allows i-TTL flash control with remote wireless flash units.
• FV lock (pg. 198): Locks flash level at the metered value, allowing a series of
photographs to be taken at the same flash level.
• Auto FP High-Speed Sync (pg. 195): Allows the flash to be used at the highest shutter
speed supported by the camera, making it possible to choose the maximum
aperture for reduced depth of field.
n
233
❚❚ CLS-Compatible Flash Units
The D90 can be used with the following CLS-compatible flash units: the SB-900,
SB-800, SB-600, SB-400, SB-R200, and SU-800.
The SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, SB-400, and SB-R200
The principal features of these flash units are listed below.
Flash unit
SB-R200 2
10/32
14/49
—5
—
60 ° down (toward
7 ° down, 90 ° up,
7 ° down, 90 ° up,
90 ° up, 180 ° left,
lens light axis),
Head rotation
180 ° left,
90 ° up
180 ° left/right
90 ° right
45 ° up (away from
90 ° right
light axis)
If a color filter is attached to the SB-900 when AUTO or N (flash) is selected for white balance, the camera
will automatically detect the filter and adjust white balance appropriately.
Controlled remotely with built-in flash in commander mode or using optional SB-900, SB-800 flash unit
or SU-800 wireless Speedlight commander.
m/ft., 20 °C (68 °F), SB-900, SB-800 and SB-600 at 35 mm zoom head position; SB-900 with standard
illumination.
27 mm zoom coverage.
24 mm zoom coverage.
Feature
ISO 100
Guide No. 3
ISO 200
Auto power zoom (mm)
Wide panel (mm)
1
2
3
4
5
SB-900 1
34/111
48/157
17–200
12, 14, 17
SB-800
38/125
53/175
24–105
14, 17
SB-600
30/98
42/138
24–85
14
SB-400
21/69
30/98
—4
—
SU-800 Wireless Speedlight Commander
When mounted on a CLS-compatible camera, the SU-800 can be used as a
commander for remote SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, or SB-R200 flash units. The SU-800
itself is not equipped with a flash.
D
Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories
Use only Nikon flash units. Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V applied to the accessory
shoe could not only prevent normal operation, but damage the sync circuitry of the camera or
flash. Before using a Nikon flash unit not listed in this section, contact a Nikon-authorized
service representative for more information.
A
n
234
Guide Number
To calculate the range of the flash at full power, divide the Guide Number by the aperture. For
example, at ISO 100 the SB-800 has a Guide Number of 38 m or 125 ft. (35 mm zoom head
position); its range at an aperture of f/5.6 is 38÷5.6 or about 6.8 meters (or in feet,
125÷5.6=approximately 23 ft. 7 in.). For each twofold increase in ISO sensitivity, multiply the
Guide Number by the square root of two (approximately 1.4).
The following features are available with the SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, SB-400,
SB-R200, and SU-800:
Flash unit
Advanced Wireless Lighting
Commander
Remote
SB-900
SB-900
SB-900
SB-800 SB-600 SB-400 SB-800 SU-800 1 SB-800 SB-600 SB-R200
Flash mode/feature
i-TTL i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR ✔ 2
✔2
✔3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
AA Auto aperture
✔4
—
—
✔5
✔5
✔5
—
—
A Non-TTL auto
✔4
—
—
✔5
—
✔5
—
—
GN Distance-priority manual
✔
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
M Manual
✔
✔
✔6
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
RPT Repeating flash
✔
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
Auto FP High-Speed Sync 7
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
FV lock
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
AF-assist for multi-area AF 8
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
—
—
—
Flash Color Information Communication
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
REAR Rear-curtain sync
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Y Red-eye reduction
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
Auto zoom
✔
✔
—
✔
—
—
—
—
1 Only available when SU-800 is used to control other flash units.
2 Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering or when selected with flash unit.
3 Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering.
4 Selected with flash unit.
5 Auto aperture (AA) is used regardless of mode selected with flash unit.
6 Can be selected with camera.
7 Select On for Custom Setting e5 (Auto FP, pg. 195).
8 CPU lens required.
n
235
❚❚ Other Flash Units
The following flash units can be used in non-TTL auto and manual modes. If they are
set to TTL, the camera shutter-release button will lock and no photographs can be
taken.
Speedlight SB-80DX, SB-28DX, SB-28,
SB-30, SB-27 1, SB-22S,
SB-23, SB-29 2,
SB-26, SB-25, SB-24
SB-22, SB-20, SB-16B, SB-15 SB-21B 2, SB-29S 2
Flash mode
SB-50DX
A Non-TTL auto
✔
—
✔
—
M Manual
✔
✔
✔
✔
G Repeating flash
✔
—
—
—
REAR Rear-curtain sync
✔
✔
✔
✔
1 Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter-release is disabled. Set flash unit to A (non-TTL auto
flash).
2 Autofocus is only available with AF-Micro lenses (60 mm, 105 mm, or 200 mm).
n
236
D
Notes on Optional Speedlights
Refer to the Speedlight manual for detailed instructions. If the Speedlight supports the Nikon
Creative Lighting System, refer to the section on CLS-compatible digital SLR cameras. The D90
is not included in the “digital SLR” category in the SB-80DX, SB-28DX, and SB-50DX manuals.
If an optional flash unit is attached with the camera in modes other than j, the flash will fire
whenever a photograph is taken. The following flash modes are available:
• i, k, and n modes: Fill flash and red-eye reduction. Fill flash is automatically selected if the
flash mode is set to off or auto when an optional flash unit is attached. Auto with red-eye
reduction becomes red-eye reduction.
• o mode: Auto slow sync becomes slow sync, auto slow sync with red-eye reduction becomes
slow sync with red-eye reduction, and off becomes slow sync.
i-TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 200 and 3200. At values over 3200,
the desired results may not be achieved at some ranges or aperture settings. If the flash-ready
indicator blinks for about three seconds after a photograph is taken, the flash has fired at full
power and the photograph may be underexposed.
The SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and SB-400 provide red-eye reduction, while the SB-900, SB-800,
SB-600, and SU-800 provide AF-assist illumination. With other Speedlights, the camera AF-assist
illuminator is used for AF-assist illumination and red-eye reduction. When used with AF lenses
with focal lengths of 17–135 mm, the SB-900 provides active AF-assist illumination for all focus
points; note, however, that autofocus is available only with the following focus points:
17–105 mm
106–135mm
When used with AF lenses with focal lengths of 24–105 mm, the SB-800, SB-600 and SU-800
provides active AF-assist illumination to assist autofocus for the following focus points:
24–34 mm
35–105mm
In programmed auto, the maximum aperture (minimum f-number) is limited according to
sensitivity (ISO equivalency), as shown below:
Mode
P, i, k, l, m, o
n
200
4
8
Maximum aperture at ISO sensitivity of
400
800
1600
4.8
5.6
6.7
9.5
11
13
3200
8
16
For each one-step increase in sensitivity (e.g., from 200 to 400), aperture is stopped down by
half an f-stop. If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above, the maximum
value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens.
When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash photography, correct
exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL mode. We recommend that you choose spot metering
to select standard i-TTL flash control. Take a test shot and view the results in the monitor.
n
In i-TTL, use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash unit. Do not use other
panels such as diffusion panels, as this may produce incorrect exposure.
237
Flash Contacts
The D90 is equipped with an accessory shoe for attaching optional flash units directly
to the camera and a sync terminal that allows flash units to be connected via a sync
cable.
❚❚ The Accessory Shoe
Use the accessory shoe to mount optional flash units directly
on the camera without a sync cable (pg. 234). The accessory
shoe is equipped with a safety lock for Speedlights with a
locking pin, such as the SB-900, SB-800, SB-600 and SB-400.
Accessory shoe
A
The AS-15 Accessory Shoe Adapter
When the AS-15 accessory shoe adapter (available separately) is mounted on the camera
accessory shoe, flash accessories can be connected via a sync cable.
n
238
Other Accessories
At the time of writing, the following accessories were available for the D90.
• Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL3e (pp. 22, 23): Additional EN-EL3e batteries are
available from local retailers and Nikon service representatives. The EN-EL3e can
be recharged using an MH-18a or MH-18 quick charger.
• Multi-Power Battery Pack MB-D80: The MB-D80 takes one
or two rechargeable Nikon EN-EL3e Li-ion battery or
six AA alkaline, NiMH, lithium, or nickel-manganese
batteries. It is equipped with a shutter-release
Power
button, AE-L/AF-L button, multi selector, and main- and
sources
sub-command dials for improved operation when
taking photographs in portrait (tall) orientation.
When attaching the MB-D80, remove the camera
35°
battery-chamber cover as shown at right.
• Quick Charger MH-18a (pg. 22): The MH-18a can be used
to recharge EN-EL3e battery.
• AC Adapter EH-5a/EH-5: These AC adapters can be used to
power the camera for extended periods.
• DK-20C Eyepiece Correction Lenses: Lenses are available with diopters of –5, –4, –3,
–2, 0, +0.5, +1, +2, and +3 m–1. Use eyepiece correction lenses only if the desired
focus can not be achieved with the built in diopter adjustment control
(–2.0 to +1.0 m–1). Test eyepiece correction lenses before purchase to ensure
that the desired focus can be achieved.
• Magnifying Eyepiece DK-21M: The DK-21M increases viewfinder magnification to
Viewfinder
approximately 1.10 × (50 mm f/1.4 lens at infinity; –1.0 m–1).
eyepiece
• Magnifier DG-2: The DG-2 magnifies the scene displayed in the viewfinder. Use for
accessories
close-up photography, copying, telephoto lenses, and other tasks that require
added precision. Eyepiece adapter required (available separately).
• Eyepiece Adapter DK-22: The DK-22 is used when attaching the DG-2 magnifier.
• Right-Angle Viewing Attachment DR-6: The DR-6 attaches at a right angle to the
viewfinder eyepiece, allowing the image in the viewfinder to be viewed from
above when the camera is in portrait orientation.
n
239
• Nikon filters can be divided into three types: screw-in, slip-in, and rearinterchange. Use Nikon filters; filters manufactured by other makers may
interfere with autofocus or electronic range finding.
• The D90 can not be used with linear polarizing filters. Use the C-PL circular
polarizing filter instead.
Filters
• The NC and L37C filters are recommended for protecting the lens.
• To prevent moiré, use of a filter is not recommended when the subject is framed
against a bright light, or when a bright light source is in the frame.
• Center-weighted metering is recommended with filters with exposure factors
(filter factors) over 1 × (Y44, Y48, Y52, O56, R60, X0, X1, C-PL, ND2S, ND4, ND4S,
ND8, ND8S, ND400, A2, A12, B2, B8, B12).
Optional • Nikon Speedlights SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and SB-400
flash units • Nikon Wireless Remote Speedlight SB-R200
(pg. 233) • Wireless Speedlight Commander SU-800
• Capture NX 2: A complete photo editing package.
• Camera Control Pro 2: Control the camera remotely from a computer and save
photographs directly to the computer hard disk.
Software
Body cap
n
240
Note: Use the latest versions of Nikon software. Most Nikon software offers an auto
update feature when the computer is connected to the Internet.
Body Cap: The body cap keeps the mirror, viewfinder screen, and low-pass filter free
of dust when a lens is not in place.
Accessory
terminal
accessories
The D90 is equipped with an accessory terminal for
remote cords and GPS devices. The terminal is provided
with a cap, which protects the contacts when the
terminal is not in use. The following accessories can be
used (all lengths are approximate):
Accessory
Remote
Cord
MC-DC2
GPS Unit
GP-1
Description
This 1 m (3 ft. 3 in.) cord can be used to operate camera remotely, to
eliminate blur caused by camera movement when shutter-release
button is pressed, or to take pictures at a shutter speed of “bulb”.
Connect to accessory terminal to record latitude, longitude,
altitude, and UTC time with pictures (pg. 124).
ML-L3 wireless remote control: Use as a remote shutter release for self-portraits or to
prevent blur caused by camera shake. The ML-L3 uses a 3 V CR2025 battery.
Remote
controls
1
2
3
4
5
n
241
❚❚ Approved Memory Cards
The following SD memory cards have been tested and approved for use in the D90.
All cards of the designated make and capacity can be used, regardless of speed.
512MB, 1GB, 2GB *, 4GB †, 8GB †
512MB, 1GB, 2GB *, 4GB †, 8GB †, 16GB †, 32GB †
512MB, 1GB, 2GB *, 4GB †, 8GB †, 16GB †, 32GB †
512MB, 1GB, 2GB *, 4GB †
Lexar Media Platinum II: 512MB, 1GB, 2GB *, 4GB †
Professional: 1GB, 2GB *, 4GB †
SanDisk
Toshiba
Panasonic
* If card will be used with card reader or other device, check that device supports 2GB cards.
† SDHC compliant. If card will be used with card reader or other device, check that device
supports SDHC.
Other cards have not been tested. For more details on the above cards, please
contact the manufacturer.
n
242
Caring for the Camera
Storage
When the camera will not be used for an extended period, replace the monitor cover,
remove the battery, and store the battery in a cool, dry area with the terminal cover
in place. To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-ventilated area.
Do not store your camera with naphtha or camphor moth balls or in locations that:
• are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60%
• are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic fields, such as
televisions or radios
• are exposed to temperatures above 50 °C (122 °F) or below –10 °C (14 °F)
Cleaning
Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After
using the camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly
dampened in distilled water and dry thoroughly. Important: Dust or other foreign
matter inside the camera may cause damage not covered under warranty.
These glass elements are easily damaged. Remove dust and lint with a blower. If
Lens,
using an aerosol blower, keep the can vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid. To
mirror, and
remove fingerprints and other stains, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft
viewfinder
cloth and clean with care.
Remove dust and lint with a blower. When removing fingerprints and other stains,
Monitor
wipe the surface lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather. Do not apply pressure,
as this could result in damage or malfunction.
Camera
body
Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals.
n
243
The Low-Pass Filter
The image sensor that acts as the camera’s picture element is fitted with a low-pass
filter to prevent moiré. If you suspect that dirt or dust on the filter is appearing in
photographs, you can clean the filter using the Clean image sensor option in the
setup menu. The filter can be cleaned at any time using the Clean now option, or
cleaning can be performed automatically when the camera is turned on or off.
❚❚ “Clean Now”
1
Place the camera base down.
Image sensor cleaning is most effective when the camera
is placed base down as shown at right.
2
Display the Clean image sensor menu.
Highlight Clean image sensor in the setup
menu and press 2.
3
Select Clean now.
Highlight Clean now and press 2.
The message shown at right will be displayed
while cleaning is in progress.
The message shown at right will be displayed
when cleaning is complete.
n
244
❚❚ “Clean at Startup/Shutdown”
1
Select Clean at startup/shutdown.
Display the Clean image sensor menu as
described in Step 1 on the previous page.
Highlight Clean at startup/shutdown and
press 2.
2
Select an option.
Highlight one of the following options and
press J.
Option
5
6
7
8
Description
The image sensor is automatically cleaned each time the
Clean at startup
camera is turned on.
Clean at
The image sensor is automatically cleaned during shutdown
shutdown
each time the camera is turned off.
Clean at startup
The image sensor is cleaned automatically at startup and at
& shutdown
shutdown.
(default)
Cleaning off
Automatic image sensor cleaning off.
D
Image Sensor Cleaning
The following interrupt image sensor cleaning: raising the built-in flash, pressing the shutterrelease, a, depth-of-field preview, or B button, using the AE-L/AF-L button to focus, or using the
Fn button for FV lock.
Cleaning is performed by vibrating the image sensor. If dust can not be fully removed using
the options in the Clean image sensor menu, clean the image sensor manually (pg. 246) or
consult a Nikon-authorized service representative.
n
If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession, image sensor cleaning may
be temporarily disabled to protect the camera’s internal circuitry. Cleaning can be performed
again after a short wait.
245
❚❚ Manual Cleaning
If foreign matter can not be removed from the low-pass filter using the Clean image
sensor option in the setup menu (pg. 244), the filter can be cleaned manually as
described below. Note, however, that the filter is extremely delicate and easily
damaged. Nikon recommends that the filter be cleaned only by Nikon-authorized
service personnel.
1
Charge the battery or connect an AC adapter.
2
Remove the lens.
3
Select Lock mirror up for cleaning.
4
n
246
A reliable power source is required when inspecting or cleaning the low-pass
filter. If the battery level is below J (60%), turn the camera off and insert a
fully-charged EN-EL3e battery or connect an optional EH-5a or EH-5 AC adapter.
Turn the camera off and remove the lens.
Turn the camera on. Highlight Lock mirror up
for cleaning in the setup menu and press 2
(note that this option is not available at battery
levels of J or below).
Press J.
The message shown at right will be displayed in
the monitor and a row of dashes will appear in
the control panel and viewfinder. To restore
normal operation without inspecting the lowpass filter, turn the camera off.
5
Raise the mirror.
6
Examine the low-pass filter.
Press the shutter-release button all the way
down. The mirror will be raised and the shutter
curtain will open, revealing the low-pass filter.
The viewfinder display will turn off and the
control panel display will blink.
Holding the camera so that light falls on the
low-pass filter, examine the filter for dust or lint.
If no foreign objects are present, proceed to
Step 8.
7
8
Clean the filter.
Remove any dust and lint from the filter with a
blower. Do not use a blower-brush, as the
bristles could damage the filter. Dirt that can
not be removed with a blower can only be
removed by Nikon-authorized service
personnel. Under no circumstances should you touch or wipe the filter.
Turn the camera off.
The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter curtain will close.
Replace the lens or body cap.
A
Use a Reliable Power Source
The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged. If the camera powers off while the mirror is
raised, the curtain will close automatically. To prevent damage to the curtain, observe the
following precautions:
• Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source while the mirror is
raised.
• If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised, a beep will sound and the self-timer lamp
will blink to warn that the shutter curtain will close and the mirror will be lowered after
about two minutes. End cleaning or inspection immediately.
D
Foreign Matter on the Low-Pass Filter
Nikon takes every possible precaution to prevent foreign matter from coming into contact
with the low-pass filter during production and shipping. The D90, however, is designed to be
used with interchangeable lenses, and foreign matter may enter the camera when lenses are
removed or exchanged. Once inside the camera, this foreign matter may adhere to the lowpass filter, where it may appear in photographs taken under certain conditions. To protect the
camera when no lens is in place, be sure to replace the body cap provided with the camera,
being careful to first remove all dust and other foreign matter that may be adhering to the
body cap. Avoid exchanging lenses in dusty environments.
Should foreign matter find its way onto the low-pass filter, clean the filter as described above,
or have the filter cleaned by authorized Nikon service personnel. Photographs affected by the
presence of foreign matter on the filter can be retouched using Capture NX 2 (available
separately; pg. 240) or the clean image options available in some third-party imaging
applications.
D
Servicing the Camera and Accessories
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon recommends that the
camera be inspected by the original retailer or Nikon service representative once every one to
two years, and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees apply to these
services). Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if the camera is
used professionally. Any accessories regularly used with the camera, such as lenses or optional
Speedlights, should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced.
n
247
Caring for the Camera and Battery:
Cautions
Do not drop: The product may malfunction if
subjected to strong shocks or vibration.
Keep dry: This product is not waterproof, and
may malfunction if immersed in water or
exposed to high levels of humidity. Rusting
of the internal mechanism can cause
irreparable damage.
Avoid sudden changes in temperature: Sudden
changes in temperature, such as occur when
entering or leaving a heated building on a
cold day, can cause condensation inside the
device. To prevent condensation, place the
device in a carrying case or plastic bag before
exposing it to sudden changes in
temperature.
Keep away from strong magnetic fields: Do not use
or store this device in the vicinity of
equipment that generates strong
electromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields.
Strong static charges or the magnetic fields
produced by equipment such as radio
transmitters could interfere with the monitor,
damage data stored on the memory card, or
affect the product’s internal circuitry.
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun: Do not
leave the lens pointed at the sun or other
strong light source for an extended period.
Intense light may cause the image sensor to
deteriorate or produce a white blur effect in
photographs.
n
248
Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting
the power source: Do not unplug the product or
remove the battery while the product is on or
while images are being recorded or deleted.
Forcibly cutting power in these
circumstances could result in loss of data or
in damage to product memory or internal
circuitry. To prevent an accidental
interruption of power, avoid carrying the
product from one location to another while
the AC adapter is connected.
Cleaning: When cleaning the camera body, use
a blower to gently remove dust and lint, then
wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using
the camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off
any sand or salt using a cloth lightly
dampened in pure water and then dry the
camera thoroughly. In rare instances, static
electricity may cause the LCD displays to
light up or go dark. This does not indicate a
malfunction, and the display will soon return
to normal.
The lens and mirror are easily damaged. Dust
and lint should be gently removed with a
blower. When using an aerosol blower, keep
the can vertical to prevent discharge of
liquid. To remove fingerprints and other
stains from the lens, apply a small amount of
lens cleaner to a soft cloth and wipe the lens
carefully.
See “The Low-Pass Filter” (pp. 244, 246) for
information on cleaning the low-pass filter.
Lens contacts: Keep the lens contacts clean.
Do not touch the shutter curtain: The shutter
curtain is extremely thin and easily damaged.
Under no circumstances should you exert
pressure on the curtain, poke it with cleaning
tools, or subject it to powerful air currents
from a blower. These actions could scratch,
deform, or tear the curtain.
The shutter curtain may appear to be
unevenly colored, but this has no affect on
pictures and does not indicate a malfunction.
Storage: To prevent mold or mildew, store the
camera in a dry, well-ventilated area. If the
product will not be used for an extended
period, remove the battery to prevent
leakage and store the camera in a plastic bag
containing a desiccant. Do not, however,
store the camera case in a plastic bag, as this
may cause the material to deteriorate. Note
that desiccant gradually loses its capacity to
absorb moisture and should be replaced at
regular intervals.
To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera
out of storage at least once a month. Turn
the camera on and release the shutter a few
times before putting it away.
Store the battery in a cool, dry place. Replace
the terminal cover before putting the battery
away.
Notes on the monitor: The monitor may contain
a few pixels that are always lit or that do not
light. This is common to all TFT LCD monitors
and does not indicate a malfunction. Images
recorded with the product are unaffected.
Images in the monitor may be difficult to see
in a bright light.
Do not apply pressure to the monitor, as this
could cause damage or malfunction. Dust or
lint on the monitor can be removed with a
blower. Stains can be removed by wiping
lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather.
Should the monitor break, care should be
taken to avoid injury from broken glass and
to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor
touching the skin or entering the eyes and
mouth.
Replace the monitor cover when
transporting the camera or leaving it
unattended.
Batteries: Dirt on the battery terminals can
prevent the camera from functioning and
should be removed with a soft, dry cloth
before use.
Batteries may leak or explode if improperly
handled. Observe the following precautions
when handling batteries:
Turn the product off before replacing the
battery.
The battery may become hot when used for
extended periods. Observe due caution
when handling the battery.
Use only batteries approved for use in this
equipment.
Do not expose the battery to flame or
excessive heat.
After removing the battery from the camera,
be sure to replace the terminal cover.
Charge the battery before use. When taking
photographs on important occasions, ready
a spare EN-EL3e battery and keep it fully
charged. Depending on your location, it may
be difficult to purchase replacement
batteries on short notice.
On cold days, the capacity of batteries tends
to decrease. Be sure the battery is fully
charged before taking photographs outside
in cold weather. Keep a spare battery in a
warm place and exchange the two as
necessary. Once warmed, a cold battery may
recover some of its charge.
Continuing to charge the battery after it is
fully charged can impair battery
performance.
Used batteries are a valuable resource.
Please recycle used batteries in accord with
local regulations.
n
249
Troubleshooting
If the camera fails to function as expected, check the list of common problems below
before consulting your retailer or Nikon representative. Refer to the page numbers in
the right-most column for more information.
Display
Problem
Viewfinder is out of focus.
Viewfinder is dark.
Displays turn off without warning.
Unusual characters displayed in
control panel.
Displays in control panel or
viewfinder are unresponsive and
dim.
Fine lines are visible around active
focus point or display turns red
when focus point is highlighted.
A
n
250
Solution
Adjust viewfinder focus or use optional eyepiece
correction lenses.
Insert a fully-charged battery.
Choose longer delays for Custom Setting c2 (Auto
meter-off delay) or c4 (Monitor off delay).
See “A Note on Electronically-Controlled
Cameras,” below.
Page
32
34
179,
180
250
The response times and brightness of these
displays varies with temperature.
—
These phenomena are normal for this type of
viewfinder and do not indicate a malfunction.
—
A Note on Electronically-Controlled Cameras
In extremely rare instances, unusual characters may appear in the control panel and the
camera may stop functioning. In most cases, this phenomenon is caused by a strong external
static charge. Turn the camera off, remove and replace the battery, taking care to avoid burns,
and turn the camera on again, or, if you are using an AC adapter (available separately),
disconnect and reconnect the adapter and turn the camera on again. In the event of
continued malfunction, contact your retailer or Nikon-authorized service representative. Note
that disconnecting the power source as described above may result in loss of any data not
recorded to the memory card at the time the problem occurred. Data already recorded to the
card will not be affected.
Shooting (All Modes)
Problem
Solution
Camera takes time to turn
Delete files or folders.
on.
• Memory card is full or not inserted.
• CPU lens with aperture ring attached but aperture not
Shutter-release disabled.
locked at highest f-number.
• Mode dial rotated to S with shutter speed set to A.
Final photo is larger than Viewfinder horizontal and vertical frame coverage is
area shown in viewfinder. approximately 95%.
• Rotate focus-mode selector to AF.
Photos are out of focus.
• Camera unable to focus using autofocus: use manual
focus or focus lock.
Focus does not lock when Use AE-L/AF-L button to lock focus when AF-C autofocus
shutter-release button is mode is selected or when photographing moving subjects
pressed halfway.
in AF-A mode.
Image size can not be
Image quality set to NEF (RAW).
changed.
• Unlock focus selector lock.
• Auto-area selected for AF-area mode: choose another
Can not select focus point
mode.
• Press shutter-release button halfway to turn monitor off
or activate exposure meters.
Camera is slow to record
Turn long exposure noise reduction off.
photos.
• Choose lower ISO sensitivity or turn high ISO noise
Randomly-spaced bright
reduction on.
pixels (“noise”) appear in
• Shutter speed is slower than 8 s: use long exposure noise
photos.
reduction.
• Mode dial rotated to l or m: select another mode.
• AF-assist lamp does not light for continuous-servo
autofocus. Choose AF-S. In single-point, dynamic-area, or
3D-tracking AF, select center focus point.
AF-assist illuminator does
• Off selected for Custom Setting a3 (Built-in AF-assist
not light.
illuminator).
• Illuminator has turned off automatically. Illuminator
may become hot with continued use; wait for lamp to
cool down.
• Replace battery in remote control.
• Choose remote control mode.
No photo taken when
• Flash is charging.
remote control shutter• Time selected for Custom Setting c5 (Remote on
release button is pressed.
duration) has passed: reselect remote control mode.
• Bright light is interfering with remote.
Photos are blotched or
• Clean lens.
smeared.
• Clean low-pass filter.
Page
—
29, 35
25
83
—
54
57, 59
54
62
56
173
35
167
74,
167
167
41
54
174
—
241
68
40
180
n
—
—
244
251
Shooting (i, j, k, l, m, n, and o modes)
Problem
Menu item can not be
selected.
Solution
Some options are not available in all modes.
Page
—
Shooting (P, S, A, M)
Problem
Shutter-release disabled.
Full range of shutter
speeds not available.
Colors are unnatural.
Solution
Page
• Flash is charging.
40
• Non-CPU lens is attached: rotate camera mode dial to M. 83
• Mode dial rotated to S after shutter speed of A or
81
& selected in mode M: choose new shutter speed.
Flash in use. If On is selected for Custom Setting e5 (Auto
FP) in modes P, S, A, and M, optional SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, 195
and SB-R200 flash units can be used at all shutter speeds.
• Adjust white balance to match light source.
95
• Adjust Set Picture Control settings.
108
Can not measure white
Subject is too dark or too bright.
balance.
Image can not be selected
as source for preset white Image was not created with D90.
balance.
• NEF (RAW) or NEF+JPEG image quality option selected
White balance bracketing
for image quality.
unavailable.
• Multiple exposure mode is in effect.
Effects of Picture Control A (auto) is selected for sharpening, contrast, or saturation.
differ from image to
For consistent results over a series of photographs, choose
image.
a setting other than A (auto).
Metering can not be
Autoexposure lock is in effect.
changed.
Exposure compensation
Choose exposure mode P, S, or A.
can not be used.
Only one shot taken each
time shutter-release
Lower built-in flash.
button is pressed in
continuous shooting
mode.
Reddish areas appear in Reddish areas and uneven textures may appear in long
photos.
time-exposures. Turn long exposure noise reduction on
when shooting at shutter speeds of A.
Textures are uneven.
n
252
102
104
62
121
111
88
90
73
167
Playback
Problem
Flashing areas appear in
images
Shooting data appear on
images
A graph appears during
playback.
NEF (RAW) image is not
played back.
Some photos are not
displayed during
playback.
Solution
Press 1 or 3 to choose photo information displayed, or
change settings for Display mode.
Page
129,
163
Photo was taken at image quality of NEF + JPEG.
62
Select All for Playback folder. Note that Current is
automatically selected after photograph is taken.
162
• Select On for Rotate tall.
• Photo was taken with Off selected for Auto image
“Tall” (portrait) orientation
rotation.
photos are displayed in
• Camera orientation was changed while shutter-release
“wide” (landscape)
button was pressed in continuous release mode.
orientation.
• Photo is displayed in image review.
• Camera was pointed up or down when photo was taken.
Photo is protected: remove protection.
Can not delete photo.
Memory card is locked.
Message is displayed
Select All for Playback folder. Note that Current is
stating that no images are
automatically selected after photograph is taken.
available for playback.
Can not change print
Memory card is full: delete photos.
order.
Memory card is locked.
Photo is in NEF (RAW) format. Create JPEG copy using NEF
Can not select photo for
(RAW) processing or transfer to computer and print using
printing.
supplied software or Capture NX 2.
Photo is not displayed on
Choose correct video mode.
TV.
Photo is not displayed on
Confirm that HDMI cable (available separately) is
high-definition video
connected.
device.
NEF (RAW) photos not
Update to Capture NX 2.
displayed in Capture NX.
Image sensor cleaning changes the position of dust on the
low-pass filter. Dust off reference data recorded before
image sensor cleaning is performed can not be used with
Image Dust Off option in
photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is
Capture NX 2 does not
performed. Dust off reference data recorded after image
have desired effect.
sensor cleaning is performed can not be used with
photographs taken before image sensor cleaning is
performed.
163
205
84
128
205
139
162
35
150
203
147
240
206
n
253
Miscellaneous
Problem
Date of recording is not
correct.
Menu item can not be
selected.
n
254
Solution
Page
Set camera clock.
27
Some options are not available at certain combinations of
settings or when no memory card is inserted. Note that
Battery info option is not available when camera is
powered by an optional AC adapter.
208
Error Messages
This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear in the viewfinder,
control panel, and monitor.
Indicator
Control panel Viewfinder
Problem
Solution
B
Lens aperture ring is not set to Set ring to minimum aperture
(blinks)
minimum aperture.
(largest f-number).
Ready a fully-charged spare
H
d
Low battery.
battery.
• Battery exhausted.
• Recharge or replace battery.
• Battery can not be used.
• Use Nikon-approved battery,
or contact Nikon-authorized
service representative.
H
d
• An extremely exhausted
• Replace the battery, or
rechargeable Li-ion battery
recharge the battery if the
(blinks)
(blinks)
or a third-party battery is
rechargeable Li-ion battery
inserted either in the camera is exhausted.
or in the optional MB-D80
battery pack.
B
—
Camera clock is not set.
Set camera clock.
(blinks)
F
• No lens attached.
• Attach non-IX Nikkor lens.
(blinks)
• Non-CPU lens attached.
• Select mode M.
J
Camera unable to focus using
Focus manually.
—
(blinks) autofocus.
• Use a lower ISO sensitivity
• Use optional ND filter
Subject too bright; photo will • In exposure mode:
q
be overexposed.
S Increase shutter speed
A Choose a smaller aperture
(larger f-number)
• Use a higher ISO sensitivity
• Use flash
Subject too dark; photo will be • In exposure mode:
r
underexposed.
S Lower shutter speed
A Choose a larger aperture
(smaller f-number)
A
A selected in exposure
Change shutter speed or select
(blinks)
mode S.
manual exposure mode.
&
& selected in exposure
Change shutter speed or select
(blinks)
mode S.
manual exposure mode.
Optional flash unit that does
N
Change flash mode setting on
not support i-TTL flash control
(blinks)
optional flash unit.
(blinks)
attached and set to TTL.
Page
26
34
xviii,
22, 23
27
230
59
74
240
81
82
74
70
81
82
81, 83
81, 83
n
236
255
Indicator
Control panel Viewfinder
Problem
If indicator blinks for 3 s after
N
flash fires, photo may be
(blinks)
underexposed.
Memory insufficient to record
j
further photos at current
(blinks) settings, or camera has run out
of file or folder numbers.
m S No memory card.
—
n
(blinks)
S
O
(blinks)
Camera malfunction.
Solution
Check photo in monitor; if
underexposed, adjust settings
and try again.
• Reduce quality or size.
• Delete photographs.
• Insert new memory card.
Insert memory card.
Release shutter. If error persists
or appears frequently, consult
Nikon-authorized service
representative.
Page
128
62, 63
162
29
29
—
Indicator
Control panel/
viewfinder
Problem
Solution
S/
Camera cannot detect Turn camera off and confirm
No memory card.
m S memory card.
that card is correctly inserted.
• Use approved card.
• Check that contacts are
Error accessing
This memory card
clean. If card is damaged,
(,
memory card.
cannot be used.
contact retailer or Nikon
)
Card may be damaged.
representative.
(blinks)
Insert another card.
Unable to create new Delete files or insert new
folder.
memory card.
This card is not
Memory card has not
C
Format memory card or insert
formatted.
been formatted for use
(blinks)
new memory card.
Format the card.
in camera.
Select folder containing
No images on memory
images from Playback folder
Folder contains no
—
card or in folder(s)
menu or insert different
images.
selected for playback.
memory card.
No images can be played
back until another folder has
All photos in current
All images are hidden.
—
been selected or Hide image
folder are hidden.
used to allow at least one
image to be displayed.
File has been created
or modified using a
File does not contain
File can not be played back
—
computer or different
image data.
on camera.
make of camera, or file
is corrupt.
Monitor
n
256
Page
29
242
—
29,
162
29, 30
29,
162
162
—
Indicator
Control panel/
viewfinder
Monitor
Problem
Memory card is locked.
(,
Memory card is locked
Slide lock to “write”
)
(write protected).
position.
(blinks)
Memory card does not
Cannot select this file.
—
contain images that
can be retouched.
Memory card does not
No images for
—
contain NEF (RAW)
retouching.
images.
Solution
Slide card write-protect
switch to “write” position.
31
Images created with other
devices can not be
retouched.
209
Take NEF (RAW)
photographs.
62
Check printer. To resume,
select Continue (if available).
Paper in printer is not Insert paper of correct size
Check paper.
—
of selected size.
and select Continue.
Paper is jammed in
Clear jam and select
Paper jam.
—
printer.
Continue.
Insert paper of selected size
Out of paper.
—
Printer is out of paper.
and select Continue.
Check ink. To resume, select
Check ink supply.
—
Ink error.
Continue.
Replace ink and select
Out of ink.
—
Printer is out of ink.
Continue.
* See printer manual for more information.
Check printer.
—
Printer error.
Page
150 *
150 *
150 *
150 *
150 *
150 *
n
257
Appendix
The Appendix covers the following topics:
• Available Settings and Defaults...........................................................................................
• Memory Card Capacity ...........................................................................................................
• Exposure Program ....................................................................................................................
• Bracketing Programs ...............................................................................................................
• Flash Control...............................................................................................................................
• Shutter Speeds Available with the Built-in Flash...........................................................
• Aperture, Sensitivity, and Flash Range..............................................................................
258
262
263
264
265
265
266
Available Settings and Defaults
The following table lists the settings that can be adjusted in each mode:
Shooting menu
Other settings
258
Custom settings 4
n
Set Picture Control
Image quality 1
Image size 1
White balance 1
ISO sensitivity settings 1
Active D-Lighting
Color space
Long exp. NR
High ISO NR
Active folder
Multiple exposure 1
Movie setting
Shooting mode 1
Autofocus mode 1
Metering 1
Flexible program 1
Autoexposure lock 1
Exposure compensation 1
Bracketing 1
Flash mode 1
Metering 1
a1: AF-area mode
a2: Center focus point
a3: Built-in AF-assist illuminator
a4: AF point illumination
a5: Focus point wrap-around
a6: AE-L/AF-L for MB-D80
a7: Live view autofocus 1
i j
k
l
m
n
o
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔2 ✔2 ✔2 ✔2
✔ ✔ ✔
✔ ✔ ✔
✔2 ✔2 ✔2
✔
✔
✔2
✔2
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔2
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔ 2 ✔ 2, 3 ✔ 2, 3 ✔ 2 ✔ 2
✔2 ✔2 ✔2
✔ ✔ ✔
✔ ✔
✔
✔ ✔ ✔
✔ ✔ ✔
✔2 ✔2 ✔2
✔2 ✔2
✔ ✔
✔
✔
✔ ✔
✔ ✔
✔2 ✔2
✔2
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔2
P S A M
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Custom settings 4
1
2
3
4
i j k l
b1: EV steps for exposure cntrl.
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
b2: Easy exposure compensation
b3: Center-weighted area
b4: Fine tune optimal exposure
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
c1: Shutter-release button AE-L
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
c2: Auto meter-off delay
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
c3: Self-timer
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
c4: Monitor off delay
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
c5: Remote on duration
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
d1: Beep
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
d2: Viewfinder grid display
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
d3: ISO display and adjustment
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
d4: Viewfinder warning display
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
d5: Screen tips
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
d6: CL mode shooting speed
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
d7: File number sequence
d8: Shooting info display
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
d9: LCD illumination
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
d10: Exposure delay mode
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
d11: Flash warning
d12: MB-D80 battery type
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
e1: Flash shutter speed
e2: Flash cntrl for built-in flash
e3: Modeling flash
e4: Auto bracketing set
e5: Auto FP
e6: Bracketing order
f1: D switch
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
f2: OK button (shooting mode)
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
f3: Assign FUNC. button
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
f4: Assign AE-L/AF-L button
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
f5: Customize command dials
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
f6: No memory card?
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
f7: Reverse indicators
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Reset with two-button reset (pg. 75).
Reset with when mode dial is rotated to new setting.
Available with optional flash units only.
Reset with Custom Setting A (Reset Custom Settings).
m
✔
n o
✔ ✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
P
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
S
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
A
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
M
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
n
259
The following defaults are restored with Custom Setting A (Reset Custom Settings;
the following table lists the defaults for P, S, A, and M modes). For a list of the settings
restored with a two-button reset, see page 172.
Option
a1: AF-area mode
a2: Center focus point
a3: Built-in AF-assist illuminator
a4: AF point illumination
a5: Focus point wrap-around
a6: AE-L/AF-L for MB-D80
a7: Live view autofocus
b1: EV steps for exposure cntrl.
b2: Easy exposure compensation
b3: Center-weighted area
b4: Fine tune optimal exposure
c1: Shutter-release button AE-L
c2: Auto meter-off delay
c3: Self-timer
Self-timer delay
Number of shots
c4: Monitor off delay
Playback
Menus
Shooting info display
Image review
c5: Remote on duration
d1: Beep
d2: Viewfinder grid display
d3: ISO display and adjustment
d4: Viewfinder warning display
d5: Screen tips
d6: CL mode shooting speed
d7: File number sequence
d8: Shooting info display
d9: LCD illumination
d10: Exposure delay mode
d11: Flash warning
d12: MB-D80 battery type
n
260
Default
Auto-area
Normal zone
On
Auto
No wrap
AE/AF lock
Wide area
1/3 step
Off
φ 8 mm
No
Off
6s
10 s
1
10 s
20 s
10 s
4s
1 min
On
Off
Show frame count
On
On
3 fps
Off
Auto
Off
Off
On
LR6 (AA alkaline)
Option
e1: Flash shutter speed
e2: Flash cntrl for built-in flash
e3: Modeling flash
e4: Auto bracketing set
e5: Auto FP
e6: Bracketing order
f1: D switch
f2: OK button (shooting mode)
f3: Assign FUNC. button
f4: Assign AE-L/AF-L button
f5: Customize command dials
Reverse rotation
Change main/sub
Menus and playback
f6: No memory card?
f7: Reverse indicators
Default
1/60 s
TTL
Off
AE & flash
Off
MTR > under > over
LCD backlight (D)
Select center focus point
FV lock
AE/AF lock
No
Off
On
Release locked
n
261
Memory Card Capacity
The following table shows the approximate number of pictures that can be stored on
a 2 GB Panasonic Pro HIGH SPEED card at different image quality and size settings.
Image size
File size 1
No. of images 1
Buffer capacity 2
L
16.9 MB
89
7
NEF +
M
14.4 MB
104
7
3
JPEG fine
S
12.4 MB
118
7
L
13.9 MB
106
7
NEF +
M
12.6 MB
116
7
JPEG normal 3
S
11.6 MB
124
7
L
12.3 MB
118
7
NEF +
M
11.7 MB
123
7
JPEG basic 3
S
11.2 MB
128
7
NEF (RAW)
—
10.8 MB
133
9
L
6.0 MB
271
25
JPEG fine
M
3.4 MB
480
100
S
1.6 MB
1000
100
L
3.0 MB
539
100
JPEG normal
M
1.7 MB
931
100
S
0.8 MB
2000
100
L
1.5 MB
1000
100
JPEG basic
M
0.9 MB
1800
100
S
0.4 MB
3800
100
1 All figures are approximate. File size varies with scene recorded.
2 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer. Drops if ISO sensitivity is set to
P or higher, High ISO NR is on when ISO sensitivity is set to 800 or higher, or long exposure noise
reduction or Active D-lighting is on.
3 Image size applies to JPEG images only. Size of NEF (RAW) images can not be changed. File size is the
total for NEF (RAW) and JPEG images.
Image quality
A
Custom Setting d6: CL mode shooting speed (pg. 182)
The maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single burst can be set to any
amount between 1 and 4.
n
262
Exposure Program
The exposure program for programmed auto is shown in the following graph:
F (lens focal length) ≤ 55 mm
55mm < F ≤ 135 mm
135 mm < F
f1
f1.4
f2
f4
f5.6
f8
f1.4 − f22
Aperture
f2.8
f11
f16
f22
f32
Shutter speed
The maximum and minimum values for EV vary with ISO sensitivity; the above graph
assumes an ISO sensitivity of ISO 200 equivalent. When matrix metering is used,
values over 17 1/3 EV are reduced to 17 1/3 EV.
n
263
Bracketing Programs
The number of shots and bracketing increment are shown in the control panel as
follows:
Number of frames
Bracketing increment
Bracketing progress
indicator
❚❚ The Bracketing Progress Indicator and Number of Frames
Number of frames
Progress indicator
Description
3 frames: unmodified, negative, positive *
2 frames: unmodified, positive
2 frames: unmodified, negative *
* Order when Under > MTR > over is selected for Custom Setting e6 (Bracketing order) is negative,
unmodified, positive (three frames) or negative, unmodified (two frames).
❚❚ Bracketing Increment
Autoexposure and flash bracketing
“EV steps for exposure cntrl.” set to 1/3 EV “EV steps for exposure cntrl.” set to 1/2 EV
Display
Increment
Display
Increment
1/3EV
1/2EV
0
1
2
/3EV
3
1EV
2
3
1EV
5
11/2EV
7
2EV
4
1 1/3EV
6
1 2/3EV
7
2EV
n
264
White balance
bracketing
Display Increment
B
1
8
2
9
3
Flash Control
The following types of flash control are supported when a CPU lens is used in
combination with the built-in flash or optional SB-900, SB-800, or SB-600 flash units
(pp. 73, 234).
• i-TTL Balanced Fill-Flash for Digital SLR: Flash output is adjusted for a natural balance
between the main subject and the background.
• Standard i-TTL Fill-Flash for Digital SLR: Flash output is adjusted for the main subject; the
brightness of the background is not taken into account. Recommended for shots
in which the main subject is emphasized at the expense of background details, or
when exposure compensation is used.
Standard i-TTL flash control is used with spot metering or when selected with the
optional flash unit. i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR is used in all other cases.
Shutter Speeds Available with the Built-in Flash
The following shutter speeds are available with the built-in flash when vibration
reduction (VR) is not used.
Mode
i, k, P * , A *
n
Shutter speed
1/200–1/60 s
1/200–1/125 s
Mode
o
S, M
Shutter speed
1/200–1 s
1/200–30 s
* Slowest shutter speed at which flash will be used can be selected using Custom Setting e1 (Flash
shutter speed). Flash will still fire at shutter speeds as slow as 30 s when set to slow sync.
n
265
Aperture, Sensitivity, and Flash Range
Flash range varies with sensitivity (ISO equivalency) and aperture.
200
1.4
2
2.8
4
5.6
8
11
16
Aperture at ISO equivalent of
400
800
1600
2
2.8
4
2.8
4
5.6
4
5.6
8
5.6
8
11
8
11
16
11
16
22
16
22
32
22
32
—
Range
3200
5.6
8
11
16
22
32
—
—
m
1.0–8.5
0.7–6.1
0.6–4.2
0.6–3.0
0.6–2.1
0.6–1.5
0.6–1.1
0.6–0.8
ft.
3ft. 3in.–27ft. 11in.
2ft. 4in.–20ft.
2ft.–13ft. 9in.
2ft.–9ft. 10in.
2ft.–6ft. 11in.
2ft.–4ft. 11in.
2ft.–3ft. 7in.
2ft.–2ft. 7in.
In the following modes, the maximum aperture (minimum f-number) is limited
according to ISO sensitivity when the built-in flash is used:
Mode
P, i, k, o
n
200
2.8
5.6
Maximum aperture at ISO sensitivity of
400
800
1600
3.3
4
4.8
6.7
8
9.5
3200
5.6
11
For each one-step increase in sensitivity (e.g., from 200 to 400), aperture is stopped
down by half an f/-stop. If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given
above, the maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens.
n
266
Specifications
❚❚ Nikon D90 Digital Camera
Type
Type
Single-lens reflex digital camera
Lens mount
Nikon F mount (with AF coupling and AF contacts)
Effective picture angle Approx. 1.5 × lens focal length (Nikon DX format)
Effective pixels
Effective pixels
12.3 million
Image sensor
Image sensor
23.6 × 15.8 mm CMOS sensor
Total pixels
12.9 million
Dust-reduction System Image sensor cleaning, Image Dust Off reference data (optional
Capture NX 2 software required)
Storage
Image size (pixels)
•
•
•
•
4,288 × 2,848 (L)
• 3,216 × 2,136 (M)
2,144 × 1,424 (S)
File format
NEF (RAW)
JPEG: JPEG-Baseline compliant with fine (approx. 1 : 4), normal (approx.
1 : 8), or basic (approx. 1 : 16) compression
• NEF (RAW)+JPEG: Single photograph recorded in both NEF (RAW) and
JPEG formats
Picture Control System Can be selected from Standard, Neutral, Vivid, Monochrome, Landscape,
Portrait; storage for up to nine custom Picture Controls
Media
SD (Secure Digital) memory cards, SDHC-compliant
File system
DCF (Design Rule for Camera File System) 2.0, DPOF (Digital Print Order
Format), Exif 2.21 (Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still
Cameras), PictBridge
Viewfinder
Viewfinder
Frame coverage
Magnification
Eyepoint
Diopter adjustment
Focusing screen
Eye-level pentaprism single-lens reflex viewfinder
Approx. 96% horizontal and 96% vertical
Approx. 0.94 × (50mm f/1.4 lens at infinity, –1.0 m–1)
19.5 mm (–1.0 m–1)
–2–+1 m–1
Type B BriteView Clear Matte Mark II screen with focus frame (framing
grid can be displayed)
Reflex mirror
Quick return
Depth-of-field preview When depth-of-field preview button is pressed, lens aperture is stopped
down to value selected by user (A and M modes) or by camera (other
modes)
Lens aperture
Instant return, electronically controlled
n
267
Lens
Compatible lenses
Shutter
Type
Speed
Flash sync speed
Release
Release mode
Frame advance rate
Self-timer
Exposure
Metering
Metering method
Range (ISO 100, f/1.4
lens, 20 °C/68 °F)
Exposure meter
coupling
Mode
n
268
Exposure
compensation
Exposure bracketing
Flash bracketing
White balance
bracketing
ADL bracketing
Exposure lock
• DX AF Nikkor: All functions supported
• Type G or D AF Nikkor: All functions supported (PC Micro-Nikkor does not
support some functions). IX Nikkor lenses not supported.
• Other AF Nikkor: All functions supported except 3D color matrix
metering II. Lenses for F3AF not supported.
• AI-P Nikkor: All functions supported except 3D color matrix metering II
• Non-CPU: Autofocus not supported. Can be used in exposure mode M,
but exposure meter does not function. Electronic rangefinder can be
used if lens has a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focal-plane shutter
– 30 s in steps of 1/3 or 1/2 EV, bulb
1
X= /200 s; synchronizes with shutter at 1/200 s or slower
1/4000
8 (single frame), ! (continuous low speed), 9 (continuous high
speed), $ (self-timer), " (delayed remote), # (quick response)
9 : Up to 4.5 fps
! : 1 fps–4 fps
Can be selected from 2, 5, 10, and 20 s duration
TTL exposure metering using 420-segment RGB sensor
• Matrix: 3D color matrix metering II (type G and D lenses); color matrix
metering II (other CPU lenses)
• Center-weighted: Weight of 75% given to 6, 8, or 10-mm circle in center
of frame
• Spot: Meters 3.5-mm circle (about 2% of frame) centered on selected
focus point
• Matrix or center-weighted metering: 0–20 EV
• Spot metering: 2–20 EV
CPU
Auto modes (i auto; j auto (flash off )); scene modes (k portrait;
l landscape; n close-up; m sports; o night portrait); programmed auto
with flexible program (P); shutter-priority auto (S); aperture-priority auto
(A); manual (M)
–5 – +5 EV in increments of 1/3 or 1/2 EV
2 or 3 frames in steps of 1/3, 1/2, 2/3, 1, or 2 EV
2 or 3 frames in steps of 1/3, 1/2, 2/3, 1, or 2 EV
2 or 3 frames in steps of 1, 2, or 3
2 frames
Luminosity locked at detected value with AE-L/AF-L button
Exposure
ISO sensitivity
(Recommended
Exposure Index)
Active D-Lighting
Focus
Autofocus
Detection range
Lens servo
Focus point
AF-area mode
Focus lock
ISO 200 – 3200 in steps of 1/3 EV. Can also be set to approx. 0.3, 0.7, or
1 EV (ISO 100 equivalent) below ISO 200 or to approx. 0.3, 0.7, or 1 EV (ISO
6400 equivalent) above ISO 3200.
Can be selected from Auto, Extra high, High, Normal, Low, or Off
Nikon Multi-CAM 1000 autofocus module with TTL phase detection, 11
focus points (including one cross-type sensor), and AF-assist illuminator
(range approx. 0.5–3 m/1 ft. 8 in.–9 ft. 10 in.)
–1 – +19 EV (ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F)
• Autofocus (AF): Instant single-servo AF (AF-S); continuous-servo AF (AF-C);
auto AF-S/AF-C selection (AF-A); predictive focus tracking activated
automatically according to subject status
• Manual (M): Electronic rangefinder can be used
Can be selected from 11 focus points
Single-point, dynamic-area, auto-area, 3D-tracking (11 points)
Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release button halfway (singleservo AF) or by pressing AE-L/AF-L button
n
269
Flash
Built-in flash
i, k, n, o : Auto flash with auto pop-up
P, S, A, M: Manual pop-up with button release
Guide Number (m/ft) • At ISO 200: Approx. 17/56, 18/59 with manual flash
at 20 °C/(68 °F)
• At ISO 100: Approx. 12/39, 13/43 with manual flash
Flash control
• TTL: i-TTL balanced fill-flash and standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR
using 420-segment RGB sensor are available with built-in flash and
SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, or SB-400
• Auto aperture: Available with SB-900, SB-800 and CPU lens
• Non-TTL auto: Supported flash units include SB-900, SB-800, SB-28,
SB-27, and SB-22s
• Range-priority manual: Available with SB-900 and SB-800
Flash mode
• i, k, n: Auto, auto with red-eye reduction; fill-flash and red-eye
reduction available with optional flash units
• o: Auto slow sync, auto slow sync with red-eye reduction; slow sync
and slow sync with red-eye reduction available with optional flash
units
• l, m: Fill-flash and red-eye reduction available with optional flash
units
• P, A: Fill-flash, rear-curtain with slow sync, auto slow sync, slow sync
with red-eye reduction, red-eye reduction
• S, M: Fill-flash, rear-curtain sync, red-eye reduction
Flash compensation
–3 – +1 EV in increments of 1/3 or 1/2 EV
Flash-ready indicator Lights when built-in flash or optional flash unit such as SB-900, SB-800,
SB-600, SB-400, SB-80DX, SB-28DX, or SB-50DX is fully charged; blinks for
3 s after flash is fired at full output in i-TTL or auto aperture modes
Accessory shoe
Standard ISO 518 hot-shoe contact with safety lock
Nikon Creative Lighting Advanced Wireless Lighting supported with built-in flash, SB-900,
System (CLS)
SB-800, or SU-800 as commander and SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, or SB-R200
as remotes; Auto FP High-Speed Sync and modeling illumination
supported with all CLS-compatible flash units except SB-400; Flash Color
Information Communication and FV lock supported with all CLScompatible flash units
White balance
White balance
Auto (TTL white-balance with main image sensor and 420 segment RGB
sensor); 12 manual modes with fine-tuning; color temperature setting;
preset white balance; white balance bracketing
Live view
AF modes
Autofocus
n
270
Face-priority, wide area, normal area
Contrast-detect AF anywhere in frame (camera selects focus point
automatically when face-priority AF is selected)
Movie
Image size (pixels)
File format
Compression
Monitor
Monitor
Playback
Playback
Interface
USB
Video output
HDMI output
Accessory terminal
Supported languages
Supported languages
• 1,280 × 720/24 fps
• 320 × 216/24 fps
AVI
Motion-JPEG
• 640 × 424/24 fps
3-in., approx. 920k-dot (VGA), low-temperature polysilicon TFT LCD with
170 ° viewing angle, approx. 100% frame coverage, and brightness
adjustment
Full-frame and thumbnail (4, 9, or 72 images or calendar) playback with
playback zoom, movie playback, Pictmotion, slide show, histogram
display, highlights, auto image rotation, and image comment (up to 36
characters)
Hi-Speed USB
Can be selected from NTSC and PAL; images can be displayed on
external device while camera monitor is on
Type C HDMI connector; camera monitor turns off when HDMI cable is
connected.
Remote cord: MC-DC2 (available separately)
GPS unit: GP-1 (available separately)
Chinese (Simplified and Traditional), Danish, Dutch, English, Finnish,
French, German, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Norwegian, Polish,
Portuguese, Russian, Spanish, Swedish
n
271
Power source
Battery
Battery pack
AC adapter
Tripod socket
Tripod socket
Dimensions/weight
Dimensions
(W × H × D)
Weight
One rechargeable Li-ion EN-EL3e battery
Optional MB-D80 multi-power battery pack with one or two
rechargeable Nikon EN-EL3e batteries or six AA alkaline, NiMH, lithium,
or nickel-manganese batteries; AA batteries (available separately);
optional MS-D200 battery holder is required when using AA batteries.
EH-5a or EH-5 AC adapter (available separately)
1/4
in. (ISO 1222)
Approx. 132 × 103 × 77 mm (5.2 × 4.1 × 3.0 in.)
Approx. 620 g (1 lb. 6 oz.) without battery, memory card, body cap, or
monitor cover
Operating environment
Temperature
0–40 °C (32–104 °F)
Humidity
Less than 85% (no condensation)
• Unless otherwise stated, all figures are for a camera with a fully-charged battery operating at
an ambient temperature of 20 °C (68 °F).
• Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software
described in this manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held liable
for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.
MH-18a quick charger
Rated input
Rated output
Supported batteries
Charging time
Operating temperature
Dimensions
(W × H × D)
Length of cord
Weight
AC 100–240 V (50/60 Hz)
DC 8.4 V/900 mA
Nikon EN-EL3e rechargeable Li-ion battery
Approx. 2 hours and 15 minutes when battery is fully discharged
0–40 °C (+32–104 °F)
Approx. 90 × 35 × 58 mm (3.5 × 1.4 × 2.3 in.)
Approx. 1800 mm (5 ft. 11 in.)
Approx. 80 g (2.8 oz.), excluding power cable
EN-EL3e rechargeable Li-ion battery
Type
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Rated capacity
7.4 V/1500 mAh
Dimensions
Approx. 39.5 × 56 × 21 mm (1.6 × 2.2 × 0.8 in.)
(W × H × D)
Weight
Approx. 80 g (2.8 oz.), excluding terminal cover
n
272
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR lens
Type
G-type AF-S DX Zoom-NIKKOR VR lens with built-in CPU and Nikon
bayonet mount
Supported cameras
Nikon digital SLR cameras (DX format)
Focal length
18–105mm
Maximum aperture
f/3.5–5.6
Construction
15 elements in 11 groups (including 1 ED glass element and 1 aspherical
element)
Picture angle
76 °–15 ° 20 ´
Focal length scale (mm) 18, 24, 35, 50, 75, 105
Distance information Output to camera
Zoom control
Zoom adjusted by rotating separate zoom ring
Focusing
Autofocus with Silent Wave Motor; manual focus; manual focus
supported when A-M switch is set to A or M. Focus can be adjusted by
rotating lens focusing ring after locking focus in single-servo autofocus.
Do not use focusing ring while camera is focusing.
Vibration reduction
Lens-shift method using voice coil motors (VCMs)
Closest focus distance 0.45 m (1 ft. 5.7 in.) at all zoom settings
Diaphragm
Seven-blade diaphragm with rounded blades and fully automatic aperture
Aperture range
f/3.5–22 at 18 mm; f/5.6–38 at 105 mm
Metering
Maximum aperture
Attachment size
67 mm (P=0.75 mm)
Dimensions
Approx. 76 mm diameter × 89 mm/3.0 × 3.5 in. (from surface of bayonet
mount to end of lens)
Weight
Approx. 420 g (14.8 oz.)
Lens hood
HB-32 (available separately; attaches as shown below)
q
w
The following accessories can not be used: teleconverters (all types), PK auto extension rings
(all types), K rings (all types), BR-4 auto rings, bellow attachments (all types), and SX-1
attachment rings. Other accessories may also be incompatible. See the accessory manual for
details.
n
273
❚❚ Supported Standards
• DCF Version 2.0: The Design Rule for Camera File Systems (DCF) is a standard widely
used in the digital camera industry to ensure compatibility among different makes
of camera.
• DPOF: Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) is an industry-wide standard that allows
pictures to be printed from print orders stored on the memory card.
• Exif version 2.21: The D90 supports Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital
Still Cameras) version 2.21, a standard in which information stored with
photographs is used for optimal color reproduction when the images are output
on Exif-compliant printers.
• PictBridge: A standard developed through cooperation with the digital camera and
printer industries, allowing photographs to be output directly to a printer without
first transferring them to a computer.
• HDMI: High-Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for multimedia interfaces
used in consumer electronics and AV devices capable of transmitting audiovisual
data and control signals to HDMI-compliant devices via a single cable connection.
n
274
D
Battery Life
The number of shots that can be taken with fully-charged batteries varies with the condition of
the battery, temperature, and how the camera is used. In the case of AA batteries, capacity also
varies with make and storage conditions; some batteries can not be used. Sample figures for
the camera and optional MB-D80 multi-power battery pack are given below.
• CIPA standard 1
One EN-EL3e battery (camera): Approximately 850 shots
One EN-EL3e battery (MB-D80): Approximately 850 shots
Two EN-EL3e batteries (MB-D80): Approximately 1700 shots
six AA batteries (MB-D80): Approximately 600 shots
• Nikon standard 2
One EN-EL3e battery (camera): Approximately 4200 shots
One EN-EL3e battery (MB-D80): Approximately 4200 shots
Two EN-EL3e batteries (MB-D80): Approximately 8400 shots
six AA batteries (MB-D80): Approximately 1900 shots
1 Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with an AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED
VR lens under the following test conditions: lens cycled from infinity to minimum range
and one photograph taken at default settings once every 30 s; after photograph is taken,
monitor is turned on for 4 s; tester waits for exposure meters to turn off after monitor is
turned off; flash fired at full power once every other shot. Live view not used.
2 Measured at 20 °C/68 °F with an AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR lens under
the following test conditions: release mode set to 9, autofocus mode set to AF-C, image
quality set to JPEG basic, image size set to M (medium), white balance set to A, ISO
sensitivity set to ISO 200, shutter speed 1/250 s, focus cycled from infinity to minimum range
three times after exposure meters have been on for 3 s; six shots are then taken in
succession and monitor turned on for 4 s and then turned off; cycle repeated once
exposure meters have turned off.
The following can reduce battery life:
• Using the monitor
• Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway
• Repeated autofocus operations
• Taking NEF (RAW) photographs
• Slow shutter speeds
• Using VR (vibration reduction) mode with VR lenses
To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon EN-EL3e batteries:
• Keep the battery contacts clean. Soiled contacts can reduce battery performance.
• Use batteries immediately after charging. Batteries will lose their charge if left unused.
n
275
Index
Menu items and options in the camera monitor are shown in bold.
Symbols
D switch, 196
i (Auto mode), 34
j (Auto (flash off ) mode), 34
k (Portrait), 41
l (Landscape), 41
n (Close up), 42
m (Sports), 42
o (Night portrait), 42
P (Programmed auto), 80
S (Shutter-priority auto), 81
A (Aperture-priority auto), 82
M (Manual), 83
U (flexible program), 80
8 (Single frame), 64
! (Continuous low speed), 64,
65, 182
9 (Continuous high speed), 64,
65
$ (Self-timer), 66, 179
# (Remote control), 68
a (Live view), 43
a (Matrix), 87
Z (Center-weighted), 87
b (Spot), 87
N (flash-ready indicator), 9, 40
r (FV lock), 198
M (Bracketing indicator), 92, 191,
193
D (White balance), 95
W (White Balance Bracketing),
191
L (Preset manual), 100
E (Exposure Compensation), 90
7 (Flash Compensation), 91
B (“Clock not set” indicator), 28
3 (“Beep” indicator), 180
Numerics
3D color matrix metering II, 87
3D-tracking, 173
420-segment RGB sensor, 87
A
AC adapter, 239
Accessories, 239
Active D-Lighting, 119
Active folder, 169
adjustment control, 32
AE-L, 88
AE-L, 200
AE-L/AF-L button, 88
AE-L/AF-L button, 200
AE-L/AF-L for MB-D80, 176
AF, 54–56
AF assist, 38, 174, 231
AF point illumination, 175
276
AF-area mode, 57, 173
3D-tracking(11 points), 56, 173
auto-area, 36, 173
dynamic-area, 56, 173
single-point, 56, 173
AF-area mode, 173
A-M switch, 25
Amber, 97, 216
Aperture, 79
maximum, 60
minimum, 26, 78
Aperture-priority auto, 82
Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 200
Assign FUNC. button, 197
Audio video cable, 146
Auto bracketing, 92, 191, 193
Auto bracketing set, 191
ADL bracketing, 193
AE & flash, 191
AE only, 191
Flash only, 191
WB bracketing, 191
Auto FP, 195
Auto image rotation, 205
Auto meter off, 35, 179
Auto meter-off delay, 179
Auto-area, 36, 173
Autofocus, 54, 55, 57
B
Backlight, 8, 183
Battery, 22, 23, 34, 184, 208
charging, 22
pack, 184, 208, 239
Battery info, 208
Beep, 180
Blue, 97
Body cap, 3, 25, 240
Bracketing, 92, 191, 193
Active D-Lighting, 193
exposure, 92
flash, 92
white balance, 191
Bracketing order, 195
Built-in AF-assist illuminator,
174
Bulb, 85
Burst, 122
C
Calendar, 136
Camera Control Pro 2, 148, 240
Center focus point, 174
Center-weighted area, 9, 178
CL mode shooting speed, 182
Clean image sensor, 244
Clock, 27, 204
battery, 28, 204
CLS, 233
Color balance, 216
Color space, 167
Adobe RGB, 167
sRGB, 167
Color temperature, 99
Computer, 148
Control Panel, 7
CPU contacts, 228
CPU lens, 26, 229
Creative Lighting System, 233
Custom Settings, 171
Customize command dials, 201
D
Date and time, 27, 204
Daylight saving time, 27, 204
DCF version 2.0, 167, 274
Default settings, 75, 172, 260
restoring, 75, 172
Delete, 49, 140, 162
all images, 162
current image, 49, 140
selected images, 162
Delete, 162
All, 162
Select date, 162
Selected, 162
Depth-of-field, 82
Depth-of-field preview button, 82,
191
Digital Print Order Format, 150,
153, 157, 274
Diopter, 32, 239
Display mode, 163
Distortion control, 222
D-Lighting, 212
DPOF, 150, 153, 157, 274
Dynamic-area, 56, 173
E
Easy exposure compensation,
177
Electronic analog exposure
display, 84
EV steps for exposure cntrl., 177
Exif version 2.21, 167, 274
Exposure, 79, 88, 90
lock, 88
meters, 178
mode, 78
aperture-priority auto, 82
manual, 83
programmed auto, 80
shutter-priority auto, 81
program, 263
Exposure bracketing, 92, 191, 195
Exposure compensation, 90, 177
Exposure delay mode, 183
F
File information, 129
File number sequence, 182
Filter effects, 215
Blue intensifier, 215
Cross screen, 215
Green intensifier, 215
Red intensifier, 215
Skylight, 215
Warm filter, 215
Fine tune optimal exposure, 178
Firmware version, 208
Fisheye, 222
Flash, 40, 70, 71, 233
bracketing, 92
compensation, 91
control, 233, 265
i-TTL balanced-fill flash for
digital SLR, 265
standard i-TTL flash for digital
SLR, 265
mode, 71, 185
modeling, 191
monitor pre-flash, 233
range, 266
ready indicator, 198, 237
sync speed, 185
sync terminal, 238
Flash cntrl for built-in flash, 185
Commander mode, 188
Manual, 187
Repeating flash, 187
Flash shutter speed, 185
Flash Warning, 183
Flexible program, 80
Fn button, 197, 198
f-number, 82, 228
Focal length, 228
Focal length scale, 25
Focal plane mark, 60
Focus, 54, 55, 57, 59
autofocus, 54, 55, 57
electronic rangefinder, 60, 229
indicator, 38, 57, 60
lock, 57
Manual focus, 59
mode, 54
Auto select, 36, 54
continuous-servo AF, 54
selector, 54, 59
single-servo AF, 54
point, 45, 54, 57, 173, 174, 175
tracking, 56, 173
3D, 56, 173
Focus point wrap-around, 175
Focusing screen, 267
Format, 30, 202
Format memory card, 202
Front-curtain sync, 71
FV lock, 198
G
GPS, 124, 133, 241
connecting, 124
data, 133
GPS, 124
Green, 97
H
H (Sensitivity), 74
HDMI, 147, 203, 274
HDMI, 203
Help, 18, 21
Hide image, 162
High definition, 147, 203, 274
High ISO NR, 168
Highlights, 131, 163
Histogram, 130, 163
I
Image comment, 205
Image Dust Off ref photo, 206
Image file, 274
Image overlay, 218
Image quality, 62
Image review, 163
Image size, 63
Index print, 156
In-focus indicator, 38, 57, 60
Information, 129, 163
ISO display and adjustment, 181
ISO sensitivity, 74, 166
ISO sensitivity, 74
ISO sensitivity auto control, 166
Maximum sensitivity, 166
Minimum shutter speed, 166
ISO sensitivity settings, 166
i-TTL, 188, 233, 265
J
JPEG, 61, 62
JPEG basic, 62
JPEG fine, 62
JPEG normal, 36, 62
L
L (Image size), 36, 63
L (Sensitivity), 74
Language, 27, 204
LCD, 8, 183, 202
LCD brightness, 202
LCD illumination, 183
Lens, 25, 26, 228
attaching, 25
cap, 25
cap, rear, 25
compatible, 228
CPU, 26, 229
focus mode switch, 25
focus ring, 25
mounting index, 25
non-CPU, 230
removing, 26
type D, 228
type G, 228
VR switch, 25
Lens mount, 3, 60
Live view, 43, 50, 176
Live view autofocus, 176
Face priority, 176
Normal area, 176
Wide area, 176
Lock mirror up for cleaning, 246
Long exp. NR, 167
Long time-exposure with remote
control, 85
M
M (Image size), 63
Magenta, 97, 216
Manage Picture Control, 113
Manual, 45, 59, 83
Manual focus, 45, 59
Matrix, 87
MB-D80, 184, 208, 239
MB-D80 battery type, 184
Memory buffer, 38, 64
Memory card, 29, 202, 242
capacity of, 262
formatting, 30, 202
Metering
center-weighted, 87
matrix, 87
spot, 87
Mired, 98
Mirror, 4, 246
lock up for cleaning, 246
Modeling flash, 191
Monitor, 5, 43, 128, 202
cover, 17
Monitor off delay, 180
Monochrome, 214
Black-and-white, 214
Cyanotype, 214
Sepia, 214
Mounting index, 25
Movie settings, 170
Quality, 170
Sound, 170
Movies, 50
Multiple exposure, 121
MY MENU, 224
Add items, 225
Rank items, 226
277
Menu items and options in the camera monitor are shown in bold.
Remove items, 225
N
NEF, 62
NEF (RAW), 62, 148, 220
NEF (RAW) processing, 220
Nikon Transfer, 148, 149
No memory card?, 201
O
OK button (shooting mode), 196
Optional flash, 185
Overview data, 134
P
Photo info, 129, 163
PictBridge, 150, 274
Pictmotion, 141
Picture angle, 228
Picture Controls, 108
Playback, 48, 128
calendar, 136
folder, 162
full-frame, 128
information, 129, 163
menu, 160
Pictmotion, 141
slide show, 143
thumbnail, 135
zoom, 138
Playback folder, 162
Preset Manual, 100
Print (DPOF), 153
Border, 155
Page size, 155
Start printing, 155
Time stamp, 155
Print select, 153
Border, 155
Page size, 155
Start printing, 155
Time stamp, 155
Print set (DPOF), 150
Printing, 150
Programmed auto, 80
Protecting photographs, 139
S
Quick retouch, 221
Quick Settings Display, 12
S (Image size), 63
Screen tips, 182
Self-timer, 179
Sensitivity, 74, 166
Set Picture Control, 109
Landscape, 109
Monochrome, 109
Filter effects, 111, 112
Toning, 111, 112
Neutral, 109
Portrait, 109
Standard, 109
Vivid, 109
Setup menu, 202
Shooting data, 131, 132
Shooting info display, 10, 183
Shooting menu, 165
Shutter-priority auto, 81
Shutter-release button, 38, 39, 57,
88, 179
half press, 38, 88
Shutter-release button AE-L,
179
Side-by-side comparison, 223
Single-point, 56, 173
Size, 63
Slide show, 143
Frame interval, 143
Slow sync, 71
Small picture, 216
Speedlight, 233
Spot, 87
Straighten, 221
R
T
Q
Rear-curtain sync, 71
Recent settings, 224
Red-eye correction, 212
Red-eye reduction, 71
Release mode, 64
continuous, 64, 65
high speed, 64, 65
low speed, 64, 65, 182
278
delayed remote, 68
Quick-response remote, 68
self-timer, 66
single-frame, 64
Remote Control, 64, 68, 241
Remote cord, 85, 241
Remote on duration, 180
Reset, 75, 172, 260
Reset custom settings, 172
Reverse indicators, 201
RGB, 130, 167
RGB Histogram, 130
Rotate tall, 163
Television, 146
Thumbnail, 135
Timer, 66
Trim, 213
Turn, 27
Two-button reset, 75
U
USB, 149, 151
cable, 149, 151
UTC, 27, 124, 133
V
Vibration Reduction, 26
Video, 146, 203
cable, 146
mode, 203
Video mode, 203
Viewfinder, 9, 32, 66, 267
eyepiece, 32, 66
eyepiece cap, 17, 66
focus, 32, 59
Viewfinder grid display, 181
Viewfinder warning display, 181
ViewNX, 148
W
WB, 95, 191
White balance, 95, 191
bracketing, 191
preset manual, 95
White balance, 95
Auto, 95
Choose color temp., 95, 99
Cloudy, 95
Direct sunlight, 95
Flash, 95
Fluorescent, 95
Incandescent, 95
Preset manual, 95, 100
Shade, 95
World time, 27, 204
Date and time, 27, 204
Date format, 28, 204
Daylight saving time, 27, 204
Time zone, 27, 204
Q0320_UM_En_Cover.fm Page 1 Wednesday, August 6, 2008 11:13 AM
DIGITAL CAMERA
User's Manual
No reproduction in any form of this manual, in whole or in part (except for brief
quotation in critical articles or reviews), may be made without written authorization
from NIKON CORPORATION.
© 2008 Nikon Corporation
En_01
6MB03011-01
En
Printed in Europe
SB8H01(11)
En
Download PDF